Revit MEP

Metric Tutorial

25703-050000-5080A

2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. IES <Virtual Environment>, IES <VE> Copyright© 2007 by Integrated Environmental Solutions Limited Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Performing an Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Resolving Routing Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 . 214 . 219 . 223 . 225 . 228

Contents | v

Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 228 . 234 . 239 . 244 . 245 . 250 . 255 . 260 . 264 . 270 . 275 . 282 . 282 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 289 . 296 . 306 . 312 . 317 . 323 . 330 . 336 . 336 . 340 . 364 . 403 . 409

Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Part 2

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 . 422 . 425 . 431 . 436 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 446 . 447 . 450 . 456 . 456 . 459 . 463 . 465 . 470 . 470 . 475 . 479 . 482 . 482

Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

vi | Contents

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 487 . 489 . 491 . 493 . 499 . 502 . 505 . 505 . 506 . 509 . 514 . 514 . 516 . 516 . 520 . 521 . 525 . 525 . 531 . 533 . 537 . 540 . 541 . 548 . 548 . 554 . 558 . 560 . 562 . 564 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 570 . 572 . 588 . 588 . 593 . 593 . 594 . 594 . 597 . 602 . 602 . 604 . 606 . 607 . 609 . 609 . 610 . 611

Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Contents | vii

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Part 3

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 . 634 . 637 . 643 . 645 . 647 . 647 . 649 . 650 . 651 . 656 . 656 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 668 . 668 . 670 . 674 . 675 . 677 . 677 . 680 . 682 . 686 . 686 . 687 . 689 . 692 . 692 . 693 . 694 . 694 . 697 . 698 . 698 . 700 . 701 . 704 . 704 . 709 . 709 . 711 . 713 . 716 . 716 . 718 . 721 . 721 . 725

Chapter 12 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Chapter 15 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . .

viii | Contents

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 727 . 730 . 732 . 739 . 739 . 746 . 750

Part 4

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 . 760 . 765 . 768 . 770 . 773 . 774 . 775 . 782 . 784 . 789 . 801 . 804 . 808 . 808 . 815 . 818 . 827 . 833 . 836 . 838 . 838 . 840 . 842 . 842 . 842 . 843 . 844 . 845 . 846 . 848 . 850 . 850 . 852 . 852 . 854 . 855 . 855 . 858 . 866 . 868 . 868 . 874

Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 880 . 881 . 884 . 884 . 890 . 894 . 897 . 900 . 900 . 902 . 905 . 914 . 914 . 915 . 919 . 919 . 923 . 928 . 933 . 935 . 935 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 945 . 945 . 946

Part 5

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 . 952 . 956 . 958 . 960 . 963 . 965 . 966 . 967 . 969 . 970 . 971 . 972

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Part 6

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

x | Contents

Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 1003 . 1003 . 1004 . 1008 . 1011 . 1013 . 1015 . 1016 . 1018

Contents | xi

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you use the default template and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select Systems-Default_Metric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit MEP is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2008?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit MEP uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.
■ ■

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■

Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit MEP, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit MEP. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit MEP classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some

Understanding the Basics | 7

or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit MEP 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. By default. This creates a new project based on the default template. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. the user interface is labeled. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. In the steps that follow. click .In the following illustration. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. In addition. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name.

Then. click the command name to start the command. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. On the left side of the Options Bar. TIP For example. and click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. place the cursor over the menu name. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Edit. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. notice a door type is specified. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. To choose commands. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. While working in the drawing area. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. click Toolbar.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. and View. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu.

You use the Type Selector in two ways. If you select the Door tool. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Navigating the User Interface | 11 .The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. For example. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. First. 9 In the Type Selector. notice the list of walls that are available. if you intend to add a door. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. Within the drawing area. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project.

Modelling tab: All the commands to create model elements. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. immediately below the Type Selector. View tab: Commands for creating different views in the project. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Rendering tab: Commands for creating rendered 3D images. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. Drafting tab: Commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: Includes commands for creating most basic building model components. 11 Click OK. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.

walls. select Views (all). families. 3D). You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . click the tab. reports. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. delete. families. and groups. Room and Area tab: Commands for making room and area schemes and plans. Construction tab: Includes commands for creating construction industry information. sheets. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. elevations. Massing tab: Commands for executing conceptual massing commands. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. schedules. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. and group name. In the Project Browser. To access the commands within a tab. Structural tab: Commands for adding structural components to your project.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: Commands for adding site components and producing site plans. windows). Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. and rename views. family category (doors.

15 In the Browser Organization dialog. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. The browser is dockable. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.■ ■ To open a view. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . After you create a browser organization scheme. The Status Bar 16 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. Do not click. click Cancel. click Wall. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. double-click the name. ■ 13 In the Type Selector.

20 Press TAB. The Status Bar also provides information. in conjunction with Tooltips. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. It highlights when the cursor is over it. When you place the cursor over a component. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. In the Status Bar. regarding selected components within a view. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. Revit MEP 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2008 Help. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. click Modify. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 18 On the Design Bar. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. In this case." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.In the bottom left corner of the window. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu.

press F1 to get help on that dialog box. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. You can use this tri-pane. If there is no Help button displayed. There are several tools that help you find information. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. For example. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. click . and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. Windows: From any window. click Training Files. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Click the Help button. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help.rvt. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. find a keyword on the Index tab. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP In this exercise. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu.Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons.

6 On the View toolbar. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 17 . 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 8 Click in the drawing area. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x).

zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and select the wall. roll the wheel to zoom the view. display along the ends. When drawing or modifying a building model. Similar controls. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. click . expand Floor Plans. called drag controls. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. Without clicking in the dialog. bottoms. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction .10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. expand Views (all). referred to as shape handles. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and drag the cursor. Cnst. and double-click 2nd Flr. Small blue dots. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. 14 Enter ZR. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. These are the drag controls. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. To modify or add snap increments. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. click Zoom. on the View toolbar. On a wheel mouse. If you do not have a wheel mouse. press and hold CTRL. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically.

and click again to specify the ending position. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. require two clicks to complete the command. Some commands. In this case. click (Move). to lengthen the wall. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 19 . and on the Edit toolbar. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. After selecting the element to be moved. for example. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.15 Click and drag the left control. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the table closer to the wall. such as Move and Copy. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table.

The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Select the plant. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. and drag it on top of the table. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. select the second item in the list.20 Click next to the lower wall. as shown. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to . 23 On the Undo menu. Move. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. In this example.

End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. On the Design Bar. click Modify. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. such as the Lines command. Some commands.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. 26 To end the command. click the Undo command. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 21 . or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. on the Standard toolbar. click Lines. Press ESC twice. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

23 . you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. methodology. you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. At the end of this tutorial.Mechanical Systems 2 In this tutorial. This workflow begins with systems planning and design.autodesk. This system consist of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. If the tutorial datasets are not present. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. By following the recommended workflow. After finishing each exercise. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. you will understand the process. and concludes with documenting your design and exporting your design. go to http://www. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2008. As you create the mechanical system. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. However. you design a mechanical system for an office building. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.

and click Save. When prompted to choose a shared parameter file. Creating Zones In this exercise. and then you use this parameter to assign each zone to a room. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog.Mech is created and becomes the active view (it is in boldface). you plan the system by first creating zones and then performing an energy analysis on the building space to determine heating and cooling requirements. and click Rename. click Yes. 24 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Open the m Zones. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you copy the room tags from the level 2 architectural floor plan to the level 2 mechanical HVAC floor plan. After you create these views. you create separate views in which to work with zones. Next. and double-click Level 2. The shared parameter file is saved as a text file. Later in the design process. you create zones for the rooms on the first and second floors. First. you refer back to the views to verify zone information. Create a shared project parameter 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Copy room tags 12 In the Project Browser. 3 Enter 2 . select Rooms.Mech. click Add. 2 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. In this lesson. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. Notice that the new Rooms group is selected for the parameter group. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. click New. 5 After the Project Parameters dialog opens. and click Select. enter Office for File name. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. This allows you to easily identify the rooms when assigning zones. navigate to the folder of your choice. A new view called Copy of 2 . click Create. and click OK twice. and click OK 3 times.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and enter Zone for Name in the Parameter Properties dialog.Planning Mechanical Systems Creating a mechanical system in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 13 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. Create a new floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click New. Zones allow you to better analyze and control the heating and cooling of the space. click the Training Files icon. select Shared parameter for Parameter Type. under Categories. right-click the view named 2 . however. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 10 Under Parameters. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Mech. planning is critical to a successful design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Mech Zones for Name. and name the new parameter group Rooms. right-click Copy of 2 . you create a shared project parameter. 8 In the Save As dialog.

If you had selected Paste from Clipboard (CTRL+V). 14 On the Options Bar. only mechanical elements are selected because the view discipline has been specified as Mechanical. TIP Notice that by selecting Paste Aligned. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range are selected.Mech Zones to make it the active view. 15 In the Filter box. Creating Zones | 25 . 16 Press CTRL+C to copy the selection. 17 In the Project Browser. and then select Room Tags. double-click 2 . All level 2 room tags are selected. click to filter the selected elements. under Mechanical. you would have needed to manually align the selection. All level 2 room tags are pasted into the view. In this case.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. all room tags are automatically aligned based on their original placement. click Check None. 18 Click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. and click OK.

select the Office 6 room component. use the Element Properties dialog to assign the zone. and click OK. Room Component Room Tag 20 In the Element Properties dialog. You have assigned zone 1 to Office 6. and select each additional room component. press SHIFT and select the room component to clear. TIP To assign the same zone to more than one room. Then. TIP You can easily identify the room component by the diagonal lines that display after placing the cursor in the room. 21 Assign zones to the remaining Level 2 rooms according to the table below. and click (Properties). select the first room component.Assign zones to the level 2 rooms 19 In the 2 . enter zone 1 for Zone.Mech Zones view. Office 27 Office 26 Lounge 25 Open 2 Ladies’ Room 23 Men’s Room 22 Zone zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6 zone 7 zone 8 zone 9 zone 10 zone 11 zone 12 zone 13 26 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . under Other. Note that the Office 6 room tag is not the room component but a room tag (annotation). Level 2 Room Name Office 6 Office 7 Office 8 Office 33 Office 32 Conference Room 31 Office 29 Office 28. To clear a selection. press Ctrl.

click the Training Files icon. navigate to the folder of your choice. 25 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.Assign zones to level 1 rooms 22 Using the methods that you just learned. assign zones to the rooms according to the following table: Level 1 Room Name Office 3 Office 4.Mech Zones view. enter Zones Training for File name. you assigned zones to the level 1 and level 2 rooms. 23 In the 1 . However. you created new views by duplicating and renaming existing views.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Office 13 Office 12 Office 11 Office 10. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Mech Zones. Open the m Zones Color Scheme. In the next exercise. In this exercise. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. you define a color scheme and assign it to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you assign color scheme to these newly assigned zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 27 .Mech Zones view. Copy the room tags from the Level 1 architectural floor plan and paste them (using Paste Aligned) into the 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Office 9 Open 1 Ladies’ Room 20 Men’s Room 19 Zone zone 14 zone 15 zone 16 zone 17 zone 18 zone 19 zone 20 zone 21 zone 22 zone 23 zone 24 24 If you want to save your work. and created a shared project parameter. do the following: ■ ■ Create a new mechanical HVAC view based on 1 . Office 16 Office 14.Mech and name it 1 . You then copied room tags into the new views. you can choose to save your work. Office 5 Office 18 Office 17. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using room schedules or accessing element properties. and click Save. Using this project parameter.

4 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ For Color. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 11 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and double-click 2 . under Scheme Definition. Apply the color scheme 9 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Zoom to Fit. 14 Click OK. select Zone. enter HVAC.Mech Zones to make it the active view. 13 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. In the Type Selector. Next. click Duplicate to create a new color scheme legend type based on the existing one.Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. and click OK. right-click the Design Bar. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you modify the color scheme so that it is based on zones. and click to place the legend. You applied the color scheme but it is based on room number. Modify the color scheme 12 Select the color scheme legend. and click Drafting. Verify that By value is selected. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. ■ Colors are automatically assigned to the 24 zones that you previously defined. and on the Options Bar. notice that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is now the current color scheme legend type. click (Properties). The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. click the Edit/New button. and click OK after a message informs you that colors are not preserved when changing a parameter. select Number for Color Scheme. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. 28 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 8 Click OK twice. 7 For Name. click Edit Color Scheme. TIP You can also right-click.

Notice that the HVAC color scheme legend that you previously created is selected in the Type Selector. scroll down to Value 22 (zone 22).The modified color scheme displays. 18 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. double-click 1 . TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. under Basic Colors. Also note that elevations have been hidden in the view to enhance legend visibility. click the color scheme legend. click Edit Color Scheme. click Color Scheme Legend. so you will need to assign a color scheme to this view. The color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned. and click OK.Mech Zones to make it the active view. Because you specified a color scheme based on zones. Next. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 29 . 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the color for zone 22 (Open 1) is similar to that of zone 15 (Offices 4 and 5) and needs to be changed for visual clarity. This is because color schemes are view specific. and click the associated color. 19 In the drawing area. and verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected in the Type Selector. each room displays the color that is associated with its zone. and click OK twice. 22 In the Color dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. you create and modify the color scheme for level 1. 15 In the Project Browser. select color RGB 255-255-128 (a light yellow color). 17 Position and insert the color scheme legend along the right side of the floor plan as you did in the 2 . The color scheme legend that you defined for level 2 is automatically applied.Mech Zones view. NOTE Rooms that do not have zones assigned to them display as white. 21 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Number for Color Scheme.

and click Mechanical. 4 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. In this exercise.Zone 22 (Open 1) displays the new color. 2 On the Calculations tab of the Room and Area Settings dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. right-click the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Zones Color Scheme Training for File name. Verify building information 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 23 If you want to save your work. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. click Compute room volumes. In the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. you perform an energy analysis on the building to evaluate energy loads. if you receive warnings indicating that the compute room volumes option is not checked and the output will be approximate. Open the m Energy Analysis. and click OK. During an energy analysis. you perform an energy analysis to estimate building energy usage. verify that Compute room volumes is selected. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. and do the following: ■ For Building Type. You also edited a color scheme for visual clarity. Specify room and area settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Room and Area Settings. Performing an Energy Analysis In this exercise. click Heating and Cooling Loads. verify that Office is selected. NOTE This setting must be configured to perform an accurate energy analysis. 30 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 24 In the Save As dialog. you defined a new color scheme and applied it to the rooms in your building according to the zone that you previously assigned each room. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar.

MA is selected. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). For Place and Location. under Energy Analysis. Rooms are then listed for the selected level. you need to view specific rooms. 8 Select 16 Office. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information.■ For Building Construction. You have verified the building information. Then. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the building information as project information. you view various rooms in the building. click Edit for Energy Data. Performing an Energy Analysis | 31 . 7 Select Level 1 for Level. spin the view to verify the rooms (energy surfaces) in the building. Next.You can also select all levels that contain at least one room to list all of the rooms in the building. 6 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Next. ■ ■ (Browser Building For Building Service (Default Room Service). View rooms 5 While pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. 9 Click (Highlight). click the Rooms tab. verify that VAV . Each level that contains at least one room is listed under Level. In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling dialog. verify that <Building> is selected.Single Duct is selected. verify that Boston. notice that the rooms in the building display.

13 Select Level 2 for Level. You can also press CTRL+A to select all rooms on a level. Highlighting rooms allows you to verify that the room boundaries are as you defined them. Remember that you may need to spin the view to see a selected room in the model. 10 With the Highlight tool active. 11 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. If you select Shading. TIP You can select multiple rooms by pressing CTRL-selecting them.The Office 16 highlights in red. or SHIFT-select a range of rooms. 32 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . NOTE Using the View Selector. 12 On the View Selector. Also note that you click to dynamically modify (spin. select a different room or multiple rooms on a level to highlight them. Next. pan. You can also view a room in relation to the other rooms or architecture in the entire building. you can select Wireframe or Shading for model graphics style. 14 Click (Isolate). The View Selector is located at the bottom left corner of the preview pane. and then select 25 Lounge. you isolate a room. the rooms display in blue. and zoom) the view in the preview pane as you can in the drawing window or you can use your mouse. click (Shading) to shade the room in blue.

and the Loads Report Summary displays. or room service values. you verify room information. The room information is located under Energy Analysis. 18 Verify that <Building> is selected for Room Type. Perform an energy analysis and view the report 20 Click Calculate. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the room information as room properties. You can also access the room information by selecting a room in the drawing area. Performing an Energy Analysis | 33 . room construction. Revit MEP performs the building calculations for heating and cooling in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). and clicking Element Properties. you can perform an energy analysis. verify the room information for the other rooms in the building. select Office 3 on Level 1. 19 Using the methods that you learned. right-clicking. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and room information to the IES <VE> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. these values on the Room tab will be blank. 15 With the Isolate tool active. or import the IES model that has already been created. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. Make your room information selections based on your specifications. Room Construction. After the energy analysis is completed. Verify room information 17 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 16 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. TIP If you select multiple rooms that have different room type. Now that the building and room information has been verified. Next. select a different room or rooms on any level to isolate that them. This indicates that the information in the building type named <Building> will be used for the Office 3 energy analysis. and Room Service. Isolating a room allows you to easily verify rooms that normally would be obstructed by other rooms and difficult to view normally.The Lounge on level 2 displays while all other rooms are hidden.

NOTE You must perform a new energy analysis each time you change building or room parameters. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. sizing ductwork. After completing the air systems lesson. You then performed an energy analysis on your building and viewed an energy analysis report. under Graphics. In the next lesson. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the rooms. and Room Summary.21 Review the Loads Report Summary. adding AC units. and click View Properties. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. Weather Data. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties). Create and modify a new ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. 23 In the Save As dialog. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. You can also select the 1 . As you place the air terminals. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. modify air terminal parameters. and validate your air system design. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Select Level 1 for Underlay. navigate to the folder of your choice. you create new views. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. click the Training Files icon. you specified building and room information. In this exercise. and viewed room to verify room boundaries.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you will create supply air systems. click File menu ➤ Save. 22 If you want to save your work. and click Save. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. In this lesson. and double-click 1 . After system creation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. including the Project Information. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the m Air Terminals. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. Then.

select M_Rectangular Diffuser . You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and click to place the supply air terminal as shown. for the Top parameter. and enter 2615 mm for Offset. TIP When you click Modify. the command in progress terminates. 6 Click OK twice.Ceiling Mech is the active view. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. enter 0 for Offset. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. for the Level parameter. 9 In the Type Selector. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. 11 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 .Round Connection : M_600x600 . you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. Placing Air Terminals | 35 . 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You can also press Esc to accomplish this. You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. For example. click Modify. for the Cut plane parameter. Under View Depth. click Air Terminal.200 Neck.5 In the View Range dialog. 10 Move your cursor to the upper left corner of the view. NOTE When entering a value. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. and press Tab. and enter 2615 for Offset. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 12 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. enter the value.

36 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . under Constraints. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.13 On the Options Bar. This places the air terminal with an 2600mm offset from level 1. TIP To use the Move tool. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. and then click . click the center mid point of the ceiling grid to specify the move end point as shown. move the cursor in Office 3 located in the upper left corner of the floor plan. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. and click OK. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. click to specify the move start point. enter 2600 for Offset. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. Thus. the air terminal will be placed in the ceiling. This is also the ceiling height for all rooms. 17 In the drawing area. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. and after the mid point snap displays. enter 150 L/s for Flow.

and then click the center mid point of the Office 4 and then of the Office 5 ceiling grids to specify copy end points.The air terminal is placed. then select Multiple. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 3 air terminal selected. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. Placing Air Terminals | 37 . 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. Notice that the air terminal start point and end point align. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool.

select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. listening dimensions display to aid placement. click Air Terminal. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. 22 In the Type Selector. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display mid point snaps only. 38 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

24 In the Type Selector.Before you move the exhaust grill. select M_Return Air Diffuser : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them. Placing Air Terminals | 39 . 25 Using the same placement method and offset parameter (2600mm). make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 120 L/s and the offset to 2600mm. place 3 return air terminals in the open office (Open 1) to the left of the restrooms.

and click OK. under Mechanical. right-click. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. click on the Edit toolbar. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. and click Element Properties. click Modify. 40 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 3 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. clear the UpFlowArrow check box. Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout 30 Select the Office 3 air terminal.

click File menu ➤ Save. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. and click Save. 34 In the Save As dialog.After you place the supply air terminals. specify the same view parameters as 1 .Ceiling Mech the active view.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. Specify the same 2600mm offset parameter for all air terminals as you did for level 1. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. do the following for level 2: ■ ■ Make 2 . Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. navigate to the folder of your choice. 33 If you want to save your work. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. Specify 150 L/s airflow for the supply and return diffusers. and 120 L/s airflow for the exhaust diffusers. Create the level 2 air terminal layout 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. Placing Air Terminals | 41 . You will be using different views to design the systems. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. In the Element Properties dialog.

In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 7 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Number Room: Name Flow Room: Actual Supply Airflow 42 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. you create the air systems. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. In the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.In this exercise. 5 While pressing Ctrl. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Flow. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. Click OK. do the following: ■ Under Category. More importantly. Open the m Air System Schedules. click Schedule/Quantities. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. under Available fields. and select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow Room: Calculated Supply Airflow Room: Name Room: Number 6 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. select Room. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. modified the air terminal parameters. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with rooms. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. and learned a method for precise placement. 4 Under Select available fields from. select Air Terminals. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In the next exercise. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements.

NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim including spaces.Room: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. Select Blank line. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 43 . Click OK twice. select Check Supply Airflow. These rooms have a difference between the actual airflow and the calculated airflow within the range of -35 L/s and 35 L/s. and click Conditional Format. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Check Supply Airflow is selected for Field. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. Organize the data 13 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Room: Number for Sort by. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine the rooms that meet the design requirements as they are green in the schedule. Select Between for Test. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. Select HVAC for Discipline. 9 In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Air Flow for Type. Format the calculated value parameter 11 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Verify that Formula is selected. Select Footer. ■ ■ Click the Background Color and select Green in the Color dialog. and Totals only. 10 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Check Supply Airflow for Name. in the Fields list. 12 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Create a calculated value parameter 8 Click Calculated Value. Enter Room: Actual Supply Airflow . select the field and click Remove.■ Room: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Click OK. and Itemize every instance is selected. Verify that Ascending is selected. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. Enter -35 L/s and 35 L/s for Value.

You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. and maximize the 1 . 16 Enter ZR. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. you are changing the air terminal connector size. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information.Mech floor plan view. 21 Close the schedule view.Mech to make it the active view. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and press Tab. double-click 1 . This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. the selected air terminal displays in red. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. 18 In the schedule. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 4 air terminal. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. all Check Supply Airflow parameters display in green.A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. 20 Modify the other Flow parameters for the supply air terminals so that the airflow design requirements are met. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. After you modify the airflow parameters. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. Use the schedule as a design tool 14 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. 17 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. 19 Delete 150 L/s enter 165. Next. All other Check Supply Airflow values that do not meet these requirements are not green and need modification. The Check Supply Airflow value displays in green indicating that it now complies with the Office 4 airflow design requirements. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. and draw a zoom region around Office 4 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. NOTE If a different project is also open. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The green values in the Check Supply Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room meets the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 L/s. 15 In the Project Browser. 44 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow.

you create air systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. If the System Browser does not respond. 23 In the Save As dialog. 4 In the View Range dialog. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. Under Primary Range. Explore the System Browser 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. click File menu ➤ Save. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. then press F9. and then create the logical connection between the system components. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. click the Training Files icon.Mech view. 2 Right-click in the drawing window.Mech to make it the active view. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click System Browser. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. for the Top parameter. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. click Edit for View Range. Open the m Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. Unlike logical connections. In the left pane of the Open dialog.22 If you want to save your work. under Extents. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. and double-click 1 . During this exercise. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. After creating the logical connection. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In the next exercise. However. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . 5 Click OK twice. enter an Offset value of 3000. This is the power of BIM. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 45 . This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. 7 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click in the drawing area to make it active. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems.

and press Esc twice. if all system components are assigned. click to place the VAV box. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 8 With the view active. TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. click Mechanical Equipment. enter ZR. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. As you assign diffusers to systems. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. So. and sketch a zoom region around Office 3 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Thus. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. air terminals. 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. after you placed the diffusers. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . 11 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 3 door. If desired. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 10 In the Type Selector. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. 46 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. For now. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated.200mm Inlet.

select an air terminal that you added to the system.Modify VAV box parameters 12 Right-click the VAV box.Airflow. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. and cleared from the Options Bar. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 14 Select the Office 3 rectangular diffuser. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. enter 2900 for Offset. Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. Next. click (Create Supply Air System). This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. Click OK. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. and click Element Properties. click (Select Equipment for System). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 16 On the Options Bar. and select the VAV box. enter 165 L/s for AirFlow. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 47 . Under Mechanical . You created a system that includes the air terminal. This VAV box services only Office 3 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. you add the VAV to this system. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals).

the VAV (the parent) to downstream. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 18 On the Options Bar. Notice that Solutions is selected. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 48 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 20 On the Options Bar. They remain assign to their respective default systems. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. Create the ductwork 17 With the new system selected. select Main. and click Select to select the system. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. click Settings. ■ Click (Next Solution). and select solution 2. 21 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. place the cursor over the Office 3 air terminal and press Tab. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. and select the system. do the following: 19 ■ Verify that Network is select for Solution Type. This display indicates that the new system is selected.The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. The organization is from upstream. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems.

For more information. Change the geometry display 27 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. refer to Help. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. For example.Round for Flex Duct Type. 24 Under System Type: Supply Air. as was the elbow itself. 26 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. Verify that 1800 is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. Enter 2900mm for Offset. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. Enter 2900 for Offset. select Branch. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 49 . 23 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. thus it is not part of the system. 25 Click OK. click Finish Layout. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project.22 Under System Type: Supply Air. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. For example. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. select Medium for Detail Level.

and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. fittings. ■ 50 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Under Constraints. Rerouting usually correct this issue. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 31 In the Duct Sizing dialog. If the entire network does not highlight. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 30 On the Options Bar. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.65 Pa/m. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. select Coarse detail level for single line. under Sizing Method. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. The first time you press Tab. and click to select them. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and enter . Click OK. Check duct connectivity 28 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. click Sizing. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. Size the duct 29 Place the cursor over the duct. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and press Tab twice. and equipment. then you know that a disconnection exists. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected.TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. On the View Control Bar. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Verify that Only is selected.

double-click the second VAV box listed. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 32 Click in the drawing area. and click Element Properties. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 4 and 5 (the offices immediately below Office 3). click to place the VAV box.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. click Mechanical Equipment. 33 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. 34 In the Type Selector. 36 In the left column of the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 51 .200mm Inlet. enter ZR. IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser.The Office 3 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 35 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 4 door.

the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights.TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. system equipment. 52 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Select from the context menu. 41 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 38 Select the Office 4 rectangular diffuser. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. If not. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. 39 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. This VAV airflow is the total airflow from the Office 4 and Office 5 air terminals. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. and click OK. under Constraints. This system includes the selected system component(s). or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. right-click the component in the left column. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. right-click. 42 Place the cursor over the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. The component highlights in the drawing area. enter 2900mm for Offset. and enter 350 L/s for AirFlow. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. and number of elements in the active being edited. NOTE After you select a system component. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. a new system is immediately created. click Add To System. 40 Click (Edit System).

The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. On the Options Bar.43 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. click Finish System. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 53 . 44 Select the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. 49 Place your cursor over the Office 4 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. 48 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 45 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. click Select Equipment. 46 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 4. On the Options Bar. 47 Select the VAV box. the number of elements has increased to 2.

a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.If you leave the mouse stationary. click Layout Path. 52 On the Options Bar. 50 Click to select the system. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 51 On the Options Bar. and select solution 3. 54 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 53 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. The system displays in red.

54 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. This was the reason for the warning message. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 55 . Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. click Finish Layout. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct.

or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work.IMPORTANT When creating layouts. You can either relocate the VAV box. 56 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you can review it and take action if necessary. ■ 56 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click to place the endcap.65 Pa/m. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. 62 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and after the end point snap displays. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. Under Constraints. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Click OK. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. or modify the duct manually. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. click Sizing. Verify that Only is selected. 61 On the Options Bar. click Duct Fitting. Size the duct 60 Place the cursor over the duct. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. So. and enter . you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. under Sizing Method. If a warning occurs. 58 Move the cursor over the end of the main. Add an endcap 55 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 4. 59 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 57 In the Type Selector. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. and click to select them.

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 4 and 5 is sized using the Friction method at . Check duct connectivity 63 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. However. The VAV box. air terminals. and press Tab twice.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 57 . It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Next. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created.

69 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. and click to place the VAV box.200mm Inlet. 66 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below.Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 64 Right-click in the drawing area. 65 In the 1 . select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . click Mechanical Equipment. 68 In the Type Selector. 58 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). 70 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 67 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Mech view.

The selected diffusers highlight in red. 75 On the Options Bar. and the red system display cleared. click to select the system. The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 59 . and enter 825 for AirFlow. The new supply air system displays in red. click . and on the Options Bar. and press TAB once to highlight the system. 74 On the Options Bar. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. You will add this later. and click OK. Then. This is the total amount of airflow for the 5 air terminals that will be connected. 73 While pressing CTRL.71 Select the VAV. You can refer to the Air Terminal Schedule or select each air terminal to verify this information. click . under Constraints. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. enter 2900 for Offset. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. 76 Select the VAV to add it to the system. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 5 air terminals to the right of the VAV. click .

click Modify.The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. 80 In the drawing area. 78 On the Options Bar. Next. and select solution 3. You have logically connected the air system components. select the left section of the main. 79 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 60 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Layout Path on the Options Bar. ■ Click . Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 77 With the system selected. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path.

select each of the 2 branches and drag them to their new locations as shown. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. 81 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the main down until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. 83 With Modify selected on the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 82 Repeat this procedure and snap the right section of the main creating a straight main to the VAV. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 61 . The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. you need to modify the branch layout.After you select the main. Next. notice that drag controls display.

mechanical equipment. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. Undo the layout. and reuse the Layout Path to modify the branch layout. 86 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. the branch path is too close to the diffuser. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. click Finish Layout. click Add to System. 62 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .84 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 85 Select the main duct. NOTE If flex duct is created instead of duct fittings. A change has occurred in the air system design. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. 87 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. The system components are now physically connected. and click on the Options Bar. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. The ductwork is created.

duct segment. 90 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. click Finish System.Notice that on the Options Bar. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. 92 Right-click. The new system component is now part of the same system. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. the Number of Elements increased to 6. and the other duct segment. VAV. Next. This verifies the added diffuser. 91 While pressing CTRL. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 63 . Then. elbow. select the transition. and click Delete on the context menu. 88 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. 89 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. select a system component that is already part of a system. and working from the end of the main. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser.

and locate the top connector. You will draw duct in the next exercise. 96 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. However. Undo and drag the top transition connector to relocate the fitting and flex duct. You need to widen the distance between the 2 elements. and click Draw Duct on the context menu to draw the duct. otherwise an error will occur when you attempt to size the duct. NOTE If you are moving the transition fitting only. 97 On the Options Bar. 95 Zoom out the view. 94 Drag the connector (and flex duct) straight down toward the diffuser to shorten the flex duct length and provide sufficient space to create the duct. At this point. continue using the Layout Path tool. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. select the transition fitting. then you are dragging the lower connector. 93 Zoom the view. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.The rectangular to round duct transition fitting is too close to the main. 64 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you can right-click the connector.

Ignore the warning message. the main is open and it requires an endcap to close the duct. 100 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. This caused the warning message to display. click Duct Fitting. The new ductwork is created. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. and after the end point snap displays. click Finish Layout. Add an endcap 99 Zoom in on the open end of the main duct. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 65 .■ Click . and select solution 1 98 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click to place the endcap. 102 Move the cursor over the end of the main. 101 In the Type Selector. Due to the takeoff based duct type. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap.

You need to change the airflow because you added an air terminal to the system. and press Tab twice. 107 Place the cursor over the main duct. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 103 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. and click Element Properties from the context menu. Size the duct 105 Right-click the VAV box. 66 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Notice that the centerline snap also displays to aid in fitting placement. 106 Under Mechanical . you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity.Airflow. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout. and click to select them. change the airflow to 990 L/s. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. Check duct connectivity 104 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.

and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. click Sizing. 108 On the Options Bar. ■ This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. specify the air terminal airflow. Verify that Only is selected. Reposition and rotate if necessary. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. 109 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Under Constraints. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned.The selection displays in red. For VAV airflow. Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems 110 In the Project Browser. under Sizing Method. Next.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork.65 Pa/m. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and enter . double-click 1 . under Mechanical. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Click OK. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 67 .Mech floor plan to make it the active view.

modify the duct manually. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 112 Use the 2 . you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. If you receive errors. 113 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. 68 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . If you receive errors. Next.65 Pa/m and select Only. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . You can either relocate the VAV box. see the note below.Mech mechanical floor plan view. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level to Medium. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. Do not change the duct conversion settings. see the note below.■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at . it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. So. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. Verify that all Other options are cleared. modify the layout. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. or reinsert duct fittings. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct.

Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. Verify that all Other options are cleared. and validated the systems in the System Browser.65 Pa/m and select Only. Size the duct using the Friction method at . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. see the note above. If you receive errors. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. sized the ductwork. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. Although you already checked duct connectivity. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. checked duct connectivity. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. specify the air terminal airflow. navigate to the folder of your choice. 114 If you want to save your work. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 69 . see the note above. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building.■ For VAV airflow. In this exercise. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. After creating each system. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. You also specified VAV airflow. In the next exercise. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. click File menu ➤ Save. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. and click Save. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. 115 In the Save As dialog. Do not change the duct conversion settings. If you receive errors. ■ ■ ■ ■ The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system.

enter ZR. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 3.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. and click OK. click Section. 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click Zoom to Fit. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 3 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. Open the m Using Views for Duct Validation. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 70 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click Properties. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 5 air terminal to set the end point. The first click specifies the section head. After you add the section. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). and the second click specifies the section tail.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Mech to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. right-click Section 1. and 5. 4. under Graphics. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. The section relocates under HVAC.

Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 71 . select Medium for Detail Level. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 10 On the Design Bar. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. click the section. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 4 and 5. The section head displays in blue. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. The selected section displays in red. click Modify. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. 12 On the View Control Bar. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be.8 In the drawing area. similar to the level heads in the elevation view.

17 In the Project Browser. select Section Box. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. 72 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click 3D Mech to make it the active view. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. under Extents. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. and click OK.14 Continue validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. 21 In the drawing area. 18 On the View Control Bar. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. Notice that in the 3D Mech view. A section box displays around the building model. click Modify. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. and click View Properties.

26 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. and click Save.22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. In the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 73 . you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. 25 In the Dynamic View dialog. 24 On the View toolbar. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. and Spin buttons to verify that the Office 3. use the Zoom. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. 27 If you want to save your work. 28 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. 4. and 5 duct geometry is as you expected. click (Dynamically Modify View). Scroll.

2 Enter ZR. click Duct.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click the Training Files icon. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. 74 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Enter 2900 for Offset. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. and click to specify the start point. Verify that Angle is cleared. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room until a snap displays aligning to the furthermost left partition of the Ladies’ Room above. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts.Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. do the following.Mech to make it the active view. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Round Duct : Taps. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that 300 is selected for diameter (D:). and double-click 1 . Open the m Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct.

enter 11000. move the cursor down and 45 degrees to the right. 8 Press Enter to specify the end point of the first duct segment. 10 Now. 9 Move the cursor straight down and draw the second duct segment 9800mm.7 Move the cursor to the left and when the listening dimensions appear. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. and click to specify the end point. and after the listening dimensions appear. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 75 . enter 2750 to specify a 2750mm length for the first duct segment.

and after the listening dimensions appear. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 13 Enter ZR. enter 3000. Next. it may not clear the wall. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. place the cursor over the duct. 14 Place the cursor over the Office 3 VAV box supply air connection. press Tab. 12 Press Esc once to stop drawing the current duct. If you happened to press Esc twice and closed the Draw tool. click Duct on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar to open it again. move the cursor to the right. and select the duct (duct displays in red). and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 3. use the Move tool to move the horizontal duct segment (located over the Mechanical/Electrical) up until the duct clears the exterior wall. you connect VAV boxes to the primary. Then. after the connector snap displays. 76 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the Draw tool remains active. click to specify the start point. Depending on the location of the first duct start point. 11 Finally. If the duct does not clear the wall.NOTE The primary duct needs to clear the exterior wall located on the left.

This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. 16 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 77 . and click to specify the end point. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. When drawing duct. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. 15 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. and press Enter to specify the end point. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. If you pause briefly. 17 Move the cursor down and draw a 2450mm vertical second duct segment. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. TIP When drawing duct.

19 With the Draw tool open. the duct run connecting the Office 3 VAV to the primary is complete. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 4.18 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. 78 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. After you click to specify the end point.

or width and height. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 79 . You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 20 Place the cursor over the Office 4 VAV box supply air connection. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. TIP If you right-click a connector and click Draw Duct on the context menu. 25 Right-click. 24 Select the Office 18 VAV. you only need to press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. Remember that you quickly locate a room by highlighting the room component and viewing the room tag information on a tooltip and on the Status Bar. However. Because the duct is complete after you connected it to the primary. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. 21 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. 27 Draw a duct segment that connects to the centerline of the primary. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. 26 In the Type Selector. the duct diameter. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. 22 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. and after the connector snap displays. and click Draw Duct from the context menu. you should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. On the View Control Bar. click to specify the start point. 23 Zoom in on the Office 18 VAV box located in the lower-middle of the level 1 floor plan.

28 Press Esc. 29 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. zoom the view to the right of the primary. 80 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Check connectivity 32 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. 31 The 5 secondary supply air system duct runs are now physically connected to the primary. 30 Using the draw duct methods that you learned.

NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 81 . The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. Check connectivity. On the Options Bar. This is because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. Do not size the primary. specify a 2900mm offset. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. Do not connect the Office 11 VAV because a routing conflict exists. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. Complete the level 1 primary duct 34 In the Project Browser. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. You will size the primary in a later exercise. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. 35 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. Finally. you will do that in a later exercise. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. and Angle is cleared. 33 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D Mech views.

37 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. On the Options Bar. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. Draw the level 2 primary duct 36 In the Project Browser.Mech to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Do not connect the Office 26 VAV because a routing conflict exists. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. You will size the primary in a later exercise. ■ ■ ■ 82 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Check connectivity. specify a 2900mm offset. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. Do not size the primary. and double-click 2 . and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. and Angle is cleared.

Resolving Routing Conflicts | 83 . You can resolve these conflicts manually or automatically. click the Training Files icon.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you use the Routing Solutions tool to automatically resolve duct routing conflicts with the high pressure supply air primary duct by selecting from a series of routing solutions.Mech to make it the active view. and notice that the duct run has an elbow that does not allow a connection from the VAV box to the primary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. navigate to the folder of your choice. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. and double-click 1. you encounter routing conflicts such as the placement of fittings that prevents a duct connection. 38 If you want to save your work. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. While drawing duct. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. Finally. In the next exercise. Open the m Resolving Routing Conflicts. 2 Zoom in on the VAV box outside Office 11 located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. Resolve a routing conflict on level 1 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. click File menu ➤ Save. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. 39 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. In this exercise. Resolving Routing Conflicts Often as you create ductwork.

and click to select the primary and its fittings. click Routing Solutions. 4 On the Options Bar. However. Notice that 2 end control points display enabling you to modify the duct ends in any direction.3 Place the cursor over the primary duct run. 5 Use the left and right arrow buttons on the Options Bar or to view the different routing solutions. you will use the solutions to resolve the routing conflict. The selected primary duct run displays in red. 84 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . press Tab once. and click Finish. 6 Select Solution 1.

10 Draw the duct from the primary air connector to the centerline of the primary below. 9 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the end point. Next. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. you check connectivity. 7 Select the VAV box. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. 8 Right-click. and click Draw Duct from the context menu. and press TAB twice.The 45 degree elbows are replaced by a 90 degree elbow. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 85 . 11 Place the cursor over the primary.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 16 If you want to save your work. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. After resolving the conflicts. enter Resolving Routing Conflicts Training for File name. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Resolve a routing conflict on level 2 13 In the Project Browser. However. navigate to the folder of your choice. click the Training Files icon. you manually drew duct to connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. This determines the airflow direction. IMPORTANT Unlike the Layout Path tool which allows you to create entire duct layouts. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Velocity. Before sizing the primary. 15 Using the process that you just learned. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned.All connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you used the Routing Solutions tool to resolve routing conflicts. You viewed various routing solutions and selected the best solution to resolve 2 routing conflicts. Both tools provide a series of solutions and the ability to modify those solutions. select a routing solution to resolve the routing conflict that prevents the Office 26 VAV box from connecting to the primary.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In this exercise. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes but you have yet to sized the primary. In the next exercise.Mech to make it the active view. Open the m Duct Sizing . then connect the VAV to the primary. the Routing Solutions tool allows you to modify a specific segment of duct. you size the high pressure supply air primary duct. 14 Zoom in on the Office 26 VAV box located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. 86 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In this exercise. 17 In the Save As dialog. and double-click 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. The routing solution and connection are shown below. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save.

The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. click Duct Fitting. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. and double-click 1 . you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. and click to select it. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 4 In the Type Selector. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. and click Mechanical.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located outside Office 18. Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. click to place the endcap. right-click the Design Bar.Mech to make it the active view. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 87 . and after the end point snap displays.

Verify that Only is selected.5 m/s. Click OK. ■ 88 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The selected primary displays in red. and enter 12. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Under Constraints. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. click Sizing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. under Sizing Method. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.

or reinsert duct fittings. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. modify the duct manually. You can either relocate the VAV box. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 89 . or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Next. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. and press TAB twice. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork.The sized left primary is shown below. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. modify the layout. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. 13 Using the process that you just learned. So. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 17.

and double-click 2 . the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 90 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. Size the level 2 primary duct run 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct.Mech to make it the active view. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. 14 Using the method you have learned. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. As in level 1. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run.The sized right primary is shown below.

Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Type Selector. First. enter 1 . 20 In the Save As dialog. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise.19 If you want to save your work. Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Velocity Training for File name.Mech. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. and click Mechanical. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. and click Rename. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 91 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. right-click 1 Mech. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. Using the same color scheme legend type allows you to quickly assign consistent color scheme legends throughout your design. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise.Mech is created and becomes the active view. Open the m Duct Color Scheme. you sized the primary duct for the building. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Mech Duct Classes for Name. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the next exercise. right-click Copy of 1 . This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. click the Training Files icon. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click Save. Like room color scheme. Notice that you use the same duct color scheme legend type that you created in a previous exercise called HVAC. and click to place the legend. In this exercise. Then. right-click the Design Bar. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. enter Duct Sizing . you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan.

and on the Options Bar. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area. delete the existing text. and click OK.5 m/s. and enter low velocity for the first row. In the Color column. you change the color scheme. Select By range. click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. ■ ■ ■ Click OK. In the At Least column. click Edit Color Scheme. and enter high velocity for the second row.8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. In the Caption column. Next. and enter 7. click in the second row. click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column. and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity for Color. select the duct color scheme legend that you placed. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 92 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

18 If you want to save your work. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. 19 In the Save As dialog. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. right-click Copy of 2 . and click OK.Mech. click File menu ➤ Save. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 . 15 In the Type Selector. and click Rename. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 93 .Mech Duct Classes for Name. right-click 2 Mech. enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme.The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Project Browser. and click to place the legend. enter 2 . 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Save. 13 In the Rename View dialog. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. navigate to the folder of your choice. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. Using the same color scheme allow you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser.Mech is created and becomes the active view.

Equal Friction. click in the drawing area to make it active. and click Show. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number. Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. and double-click 1 . and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click Close to deactivate the Show tool.In this exercise. then press F9. You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. 2 In the System Browser. you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Every supply air system that you created is listed. you split the duct main into multiple pieces. not ductwork (physical connections). and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. The 1 . TIP If the System Browser is closed. expand the Mechanical systems folder. and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size. 3 Right-click Supply Air. click the Training Files icon. 5 In the Element(s) In View dialog. If the System Browser does not respond. such as Mechanical Supply Air 6. To accomplish this. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. Finally. press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it.Mech to make it the active view. 94 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In this exercise. you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. First. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. such as a VAV box and diffusers. and click Expand All.Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3. you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. Open the m Duct Sizing . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method In 2 previous exercises. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser.

9 With the Split tool open. 10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. and split the main 2400mm from the end of the main. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. split the main to the left of the middle branch at 4300mm from the beginning of the main.Split the main 6 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. Note that the VAV box is not selected. and click to select them. TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display. 7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. click (Split). Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 95 . and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box.

NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment. for Ducts. and click to place each tag. ignore this warning. 16 In the Tags dialog. and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. under Sizing Method. you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. ■ IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. under Category. verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded. Notice that as the airflow decreases.12 On the Options Bar. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at . You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it. Under Constraints. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. do the following: ■ ■ Select Equal Friction. Click Tags. 96 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 15 On the Options Bar. Clear Leader. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog.65 Pa/m. transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. and click Cancel. and enter . click Tag ➤ By Category. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Next. click Sizing.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. Open the m Inspecting Air Systems.Equal Friction Training for File name. Inspecting Air Systems | 97 . you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 21 In the Save As dialog. select the tag and drag it to a new location. 2 Right-click in the view. 20 If you want to save your work. In this exercise. you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. pressure. In the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. and click Save.TIP To reposition a tag. Finally. and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using this tool. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement. and double-click 2 . First. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click File menu ➤ Save.Mech to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Duct Sizing . you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments. Inspecting Air Systems In this exercise.

98 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar.You will inspect this system. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. select any duct segment. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. click Inspect. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. pressure. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow. select (Inspect). Right-click a system from the System Browser. IMPORTANT To select a system. After the System Inspector opens. or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click . System tools display on the Options Bar. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. and click Inspect from the context menu. and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. 5 On the Options Bar. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. duct fitting. diffuser. A tooltip also displays the system information. 6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar.

12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. also known as the critical path. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Inspecting Air Systems | 99 . Next. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment. you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. 10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. click to temporarily place the inspection flag on segment. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. These are not logically connected to this system. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment.

You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction. and click View Properties. right-click Roof. under Graphics. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Roof. In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. click File menu ➤ Save. The primary is physically but not logically connected. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. A new view called Copy of Roof is created and becomes the active view. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and pressure information for various systems in the project. Open the m Placing AC Units. select Mechanical for Discipline. you place 2 AC units. You also compared system information across a system. enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name. Placing Air Conditioning Units In this exercise. and click OK. In a later exercise. Create a new roof plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click the Training Files icon. 2 In the Project Browser. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 6 Click OK. and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 4 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view. you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. For example. 3 Enter Roof Mech for Name. 16 If you want to save your work. navigate to the folder of your choice. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Save. and click Rename. 17 In the Save As dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. airflow. you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. 100 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. and then click Modify on the Design Bar. 10 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 101 . 12 Click to place the AC unit. 9 In the Type Selector. Zoom in if necessary to locate the lower end point snap.25 Ton .This specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. 11 Snap to the lower end point of the horizontal partition wall in the Men’s Room as shown.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). click Mechanical Equipment. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser. You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. select M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter ZR. Add the AC Unit that services level 2 7 In the Roof Mechanical view.

14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 15 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 8 VAV box.Next. 19 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 102 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 16 Move the cursor to the right. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). select HVAC for Sub Discipline. and click Properties. 17 In the Project Browser. Create a new section view 13 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. right-click Section 2. A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. click Section. and click to specify the section start point. and after the cursor is past the AC unit. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. click to specify the section end point.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 103 .20 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. click Medium for Detail Level. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. and click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. 23 On the View Control Bar. 25 Select the AC unit. NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes. 24 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle. 21 On the Design Bar. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 22 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. click Modify. notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface. you must relocate it. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. AC units are level-based components. To place the AC unit on the roof surface.

First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. Remember to relocate the view in the Project Browser as you did with the Section 2 view. 104 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . ■ Create a new section view above the AC unit as shown below.26 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit. (300mm directly above the start point). Next. Place the level 1 AC unit 28 Using the methods that you learned.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. This specifies the AC unit offset level of 300mm which moves the AC unit to the roof surface. and move the top edge of the AC unit 500mm down. click to specify the move end point. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface. TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. and adjust the depth view clip plane to capture the level 1 AC unit only. (Remember to select the reference edge first). and after the end point snap displays. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.25 Ton . place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures: ■ Work in the Roof Mech view. click to specify the move start point. 27 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit. The AC unit placement is shown below. use the Align tool (on the Tools toolbar) to align the left edge of the level 1 AC unit to the left edge of the level 2 AC unit. and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . Then snap the top edge of the AC unit to the upper mechanical room wall and click to place it. Use the Move tool.

First. you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. and double-click 3D Mech to make the view active. you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. In the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Save. 30 In the Save As dialog. 2 Select the section box. ■ 29 If you want to save your work. and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof. Open the m Completing Supply Air Systems. relocate the AC unit 300mm above the roof level to place the AC unit on the roof surface.■ Using the new Section 3 view with Medium detail level. Completing the Supply Air Systems In this exercise. The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. Modify the 3D Mech view 1 In the Project Browser. you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. click the Training Files icon. navigate to the folder of your choice. Then. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Placing AC Units Training for File name. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 105 . you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design.

TIP You can also press Shift-middle mouse button. Remember that. Note that if this option is unavailable. click (Dynamically Modify View). and while pressing the middle mouse button. and drag the mouse to spin the model. Tile the views 5 With the 3D Mech view active. 106 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The entire building including the AC units display. if you do this. you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D Mech views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. 4 Use the Spin button on the Dynamic View dialog. If you like. drag the mouse to spin the model as shown. Next. the active view is the only open window. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. 3 On the View toolbar. you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later.

TIP When tiling 2 views. 7 Enter WT to tile both windows. select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. Enter -750 for Offset. and press Tab. place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection. 8 Zoom the view in both windows as shown. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. the active view is tiled to the left. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 107 . ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. TIP When drawing duct. This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. under Mechanical. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 12 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 11 In the Roof Mech view. do the following: ■ Enter 1700 for W: (width). you did not begin drawing duct before pressing Spacebar You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Selector. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. 13 Move the cursor up to begin drawing duct and press Spacebar to match the duct size and offset to the AC supply connection size and offset. the connector snap displays. and 500 for H: (height).6 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. click Duct.

16 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Move the cursor up. 108 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 17 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.The -750mm offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system. The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 2900mm from level 2. If the 2 are different. Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components. and after listing dimensions display. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. connections are automatically created. and then the duct continues horizontally for 1050mm. 2900mm. Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. enter 1050 and press Enter to specify the end point.

You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You now switch to the 2 . This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 . and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 .Mech to make it the active view. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry.Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser.Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 109 . On the View Control Bar. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. 20 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 19 In the Project Browser.Mech view. Notice that only the duct riser displays. 18 Close the Roof Mech view. double-click 2 .

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. verify that 2900 is specified. and while pressing CTRL. Verify that Auto connect is selected.21 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment. 22 In the 2 Mech view. select Round Duct : Taps. click to specify the start point. 25 In the Type Selector. 26 On the Options Bar. For Offset. select the horizontal primary segment. select 450. click Duct. The selected items display in red. 110 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and after the mid point snap displays. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select the adjoining elbow. 23 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). 27 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser.

and after the centerline snap displays. 29 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 111 . 30 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. click to specify the end point. The left primary is connected to the AC unit.28 Move the cursor over the primary.

You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.Next. and place the cursor over the end connector.Mech view. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. 32 In the 2 . 112 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 33 Select the right primary duct. 31 Spin the 3D Mech view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection.

This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create duct. you should always verify that the duct type is correct in the Type Selector. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. . if you use the Create Similar tool. or by right-clicking a connector. NOTE When drawing duct either by using Duct draw tool on the Design Bar. and after the connector snap displays. and after the centerline snap displays. 35 Select the primary duct. click (Create Similar). and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. click to specify the duct segment end point. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 113 . click and draw the primary to the left over the wall. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. However.34 Drag the connector to right. 36 On the Edit toolbar. 37 Place the cursor over the end of the primary.

114 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .38 Draw the primary down 1000mm. and click to specify the segment end point. 40 The primary duct is created and connected to the riser. and click to specify the end point. 39 Draw the primary to the edge of the AC duct riser.

Mech view. However.41 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Create Similar tool. Check connectivity 43 In the 2 . you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. 42 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 115 . place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.

46 In the Type Selector. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run.The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. click Duct Fitting. zoom in on the duct riser. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. click to add the endcap. 45 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. 47 Place your cursor over the top edge. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays.Mech view. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. 116 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Add endcaps 44 In the 2 .

The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement.. click to add the endcap. 51 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.48 With the Duct Fitting tool open. 50 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. Verify endcap placement 52 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 117 . 49 In the Type Selector. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow.

Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. 56 With the 2 views tiled. click in the 2 . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. 57 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner.Mech view to make it active. 54 Using the 2 views. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. Create the high pressure supply air system. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. verify the duct riser endcap. 118 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Next. 53 In the 3D Mech view. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. and then validate its geometry.A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. 55 Press Tab to check connectivity.

60 On the Options Bar. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. click selected VAV boxes to it. and click OK. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of the current view are selected. In this case. and then select Mechanical Equipment. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 119 . You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D Mech view. 59 In the Filter dialog. (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the 61 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. and select the level 2 AC unit.Mech view range. click Check None. 58 On the Options Bar.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. 62 Click the 3D Mech view title bar to make the window active. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2.

notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 24 system listing. 65 In the System Browser. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed 66 Expand M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . 120 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the Unassigned folder. all system components must be logically connected by a system. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. expand Mechanical. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. 68 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. Validate the primary supply air system 64 Press F9 to open the System Browser. Supply Air. 67 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 24 to view the VAV boxes. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. However.You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. and click Select. 63 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. This is the system that you just created. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). or even without ductwork.

right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. 74 Make the 3D Mech view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system.Mech drawing area to make the view active. Inspect the primary supply air system 69 In the System Browser. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. 2900mm. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. diffuser. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. Specify the offset to -4400mm. Complete the level 1 supply air system 77 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. click Inspect. 72 Click a blank space in the 2 . Click the supply connector. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. Next. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 1700mm width. move the cursor down. 75 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. click Inspect. and enter 1050mm. ■ ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 121 . 76 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. 70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. The System Inspector tool opens. Next. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. and click Inspect. 73 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. duct fitting. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information.The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. 71 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and a 500mm height. you inspect the system.

Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. Watch for the centerline snap as shown. This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. open the 1 . and tile it to the left of the 3D Mech view.This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit.Mech view.Mech view.Mech view (if open). ■ 122 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the 1 . and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct.

■ In the 1 . and after the edge highlights. select the left primary duct segment. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. release the mouse button. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. Instead of drawing duct.Mech view. ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 123 . The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. Use M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. and remember to zoom the view.■ Connect the primary to the AC. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D Mech view.

■ 78 If you want to save your work. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using tiled windows. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. you need to validate them. click File menu ➤ Save. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. Validate the system using the System Browser. In this exercise. and inspect the system with the System Inspector. and quickly target those systems that need attention. and click Save. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. and validated these logical connections. In this exercise. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 79 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. and for duct sizing. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. 124 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you check the systems in your project.■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system.

thus assigning the components to a system. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. So. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. the duct is now associated with that system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. and for duct sizing. Checking Air Systems | 125 . the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. click the Training Files icon. In the System Browser. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. Then. However. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Revit MEP lists the system components that are associated with each warning. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. Open the m Checking Air Systems. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you view the warnings. After you assign the system components to a system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. For example.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. click Check Duct Systems. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. as a tutorial exercise.

confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. Depending on your air systems design. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. 8 Right-click Supply Air.The red lines represent the default logical connection. you create hydronic piping systems. 11 In the Save As dialog. In this lesson. 6 Using the same methods. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. Then. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. You now confirm the systems that you created. In the next lesson. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. navigate to the folder of your choice. 10 If you want to save your work. otherwise click Close. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. and click Select Press to view it and its assigned system components. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. 9 Right-click a system. click File menu ➤ Save.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. 126 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Save. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. TIP If you have multiple views open. In this exercise. placing a circulator pump. and inspecting the piping system.

right-click 2 Mech. Next. and click Edit for View Range. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 In the View Range dialog. right-click Copy of 2 . pipes. for Level. and enter -3500mm for Offset. For Bottom. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. and click OK. A new view called Copy of 2 . click the Annotation Categories tab.Piping for Name. 3 In the Rename View dialog. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. scroll down to the Extents category. enter 2 . verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. 2 In the Project Browser. This hides the grid lines to make it easier to place the fin-tube radiators. and the systems to logically connect the system components. clear Grids. a boiler. Creating Piping Views | 127 . under Graphics. and click Rename. you create new views in which to design the piping system.Mech. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. First. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and enter -3500 for Offset. 6 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. circulator pump.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 7 Click OK. and under Visibility. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. After completing the air systems lesson. Under View Depth. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you change the view range. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building.Piping view selected in the Project Browser. Enter 950 for Cut plane Offset. and enter 950mm for Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. click the Training Files icon. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the view Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. click properties. Open the m Creating Piping Views. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top.Mech is created and becomes the active view.

15 In the Filters dialog. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. On the Filters tab. 18 Under Filter Rules.NOTE When entering a value. and click OK. For example. do the following: ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. it will be best to create filters. The 2 . IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. they will not filter all system elements needed. Considering this. under Filters. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. 10 Click OK twice. In this lesson. 14 Click Edit/New. click in the drawing area to make the view active. 11 You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. 128 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click 16 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. the system filters are not used.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. (New). click the Filters tab. select Mechanical Equipment. So. Create and define filters 12 In the 2 . you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. 17 Under Categories.Piping view. however. and press Tab. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. just enter the value. 13 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Also notice that 2 . and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. However. and enter VG. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. you can add and activate filters. and verify that equals is selected. you do not need to type measurement symbols.

You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. enter Air Terminal for Description. you must spell both verbatim. 25 In the Type Selector. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. So. under Filters. Creating Piping Views | 129 . then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). Click Apply. under Identity Data. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. This adds a description for all Exhaust Air Grill air terminals of the type M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. otherwise the filter will not work. click 20 Enter Air Terminals for Name. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). 28 In the Type Properties dialog. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. you need a define common filter criteria. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. click Air Terminal. you create a description as the common filter criteria. type name. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. click (Properties). select Description for Filter by. Depending on the filter criteria. To do this. 26 On the Options Bar. click Air Terminals. and verify that equals is selected. 22 Under Filter Rules. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. 23 Enter Air Terminal for the description. return. system type. Verify that none is selected for And. . 21 Under Categories. 19 In the Filters dialog. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. However. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Edit / New. 29 Click Apply. This is the same rule for using formulae. Next. Next. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. or even a description that you define. you may want to select each component type separately. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. such as family name. and click OK.■ ■ ■ Select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV for the family name.

Category: Duct Fittings. create the following new filters according to the specifications. 33 Click OK twice.Next. 130 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Category: Flex Ducts. verify that equals is selected.Round Connection. verify that equals is selected. you will not see the Description type parameter. verify that equals is selected. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. ■ ■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. To filter multiple duct fitting types. then the type parameters will not display. 32 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the return air diffusers. 38 Using the methods that you just learned. verify that equals is selected. click Edit/New. Category: Ducts. This is because the selected supply. select M_600x600 . For Type. Round Ducts. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . Category: Ducts. 35 Click in the 2 . 36 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . you have 2 types of rectangular duct. and click Apply. 37 On the Filters tab. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. Filter by: Family Name. So. and enter Supply Air for system type name. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Next. you can select it. Remember to click Apply. And: Type Name. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. Remember. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. Filter by: Family Name. ■ Flex Ducts .Piping view to make it active. you continue to create and define the filters. Next.Duct Fittings. 30 In the Type Properties dialog.Round. ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. click the Filters tab.200 Neck. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. And: Type Name. 31 Under Identity Data. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. verify that equals is selected. you specify a family and a type name. 39 Click OK. if differences exist in the selected elements. By selecting each air terminal type separately. and select Air Terminal. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. 34 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. and select Round Duct for the family name. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. you filter duct fittings by system type. Because you already entered the description. verify that equals is selected. and enter VG. click in the Value column for Description. verify that equals is selected. So. Category: Ducts. Filter by: System Type. you need to define the filter again. you need a common filter criteria. return. Filter by: Family Name. If you did not click Apply. Filter by: Family Name.

You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden.Mech. and click OK. Next. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. you activate the filters. click Add. You used this duct to create the duct riser.Mech is created and becomes the active view.You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. you add and activate the filters. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. 42 Under Visibility.Piping for Name. 46 Enter 1 . select all of the filters that you created. Next. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. Creating Piping Views | 131 . and click Rename. This is because you have not added them. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. Create the level 1 piping view 44 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. 43 Click OK. and click View Properties. Add and activate filters 40 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You now define the view properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 1 Mech. and click OK. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. Next. A new view called Copy of 1 . 45 In the Project Browser. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. right-click Copy of 1 . 41 In the Add Filters dialog. under Graphics. do the following: ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. 47 Right-click in the drawing area.

Piping view. ducts. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. 57 Right-click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and to create the level 1 piping system. As you create the pipe runs. such as halftone architecture. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 52 In the View Range dialog. 49 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 55 In the Project Browser. 59 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. 56 Enter 3D Piping for Name. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. you change the view range. you will want to validate the geometry. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Grids. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. You do not need to use filters to place the boiler. Next. scroll down to the Extents category. and click Edit for View Range. and click View Properties. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except for the boiler pipe connection). and click OK. under Graphics. click the Annotation Categories tab. Unlike the 2 . you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. 132 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you will be unable to view the duct riser. 50 Click OK. and click Rename. The 1 . click the Filters tab.Piping view displays the new view settings. under Primary Range. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 Click OK twice. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. and under Visibility. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Next. Create the 3D Piping view 54 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D Mech. If you turn off ducts visibility.■ ■ Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 3000 is specified for Top Offset.

select all of the filters that you created. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. You used this duct to create the duct riser. You also created filters to display certain system components. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. 66 If you want to save your work. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. 4 In the Type Selector. 61 In the Add Filters dialog. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler.60 On the Filters tab. click Add. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. select M_Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : M_25 NPT. click File menu ➤ Save. you place the radiators and a boiler. Open the m Placing Radiators and Boiler. navigate to the folder of your choice. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. and click Piping. click Mechanical Equipment. 62 Under Visibility. and click Save. In the next exercise. 67 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. under Extents.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Piping to make it the active view. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. 65 Click OK. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 133 . click the Training Files icon. 63 Click OK. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. clear Section Box to turn it off. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 2 .

and notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display.5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. 8 Click to place the radiator. 6 Zoom in on Office 6 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. 134 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. except for the windows on the radius wall. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown.

If so. Next. under Mechanical Loads. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0. and click OK. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. right-click a radiator. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. drag the section tail. If the same type of component exists on another level.25 L/s is specified for all of the selected radiators. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson.25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the building. click . The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. double-click 1 . for Flow. and click Select All Instances. 14 Enter . 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. 12 On the Options Bar. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. and you do not want to include it. All level 2 radiators display in red. Next. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. then these are different across the selected objects.Piping to make this the active view. you modify the radiator flow rate. verify that 1.25 for Flow. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. you place the boiler.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. If parameters are blank. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 135 .

right-click the boiler. you verify the boiler flow rate. click Mechanical Equipment. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the drawing area. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. Next.16 Enter ZR. and select M_Boiler : M_Standard from the Type Selector.50 L/s is set for Max Flow. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. You can filter the air terminals to make it easier to see the dimensions. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. and click Element Properties. 136 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . under Type Parameters. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. and click to place the boiler 1200mm from the right vertical wall and 400mm from the horizontal wall in Open 1 as shown. verify that 14. watch the listening dimensions. Notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display after you place the boiler.

and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 23 If you want to save your work. navigate to the folder of your choice. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. if all system components are assigned. click File menu ➤ Save. If the System Browser does not respond. after you placed the radiators and boiler. After creating the logical connection. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. then press F9. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. click in the drawing area to make it active. click System Browser. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. 1 In the Project Browser. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. So. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create the supply and return piping systems. During this exercise. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Creating the Piping Systems | 137 . You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. and click Save.Piping to make it the active view. and then create the logical connection between these system components. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. As you assign radiators to systems. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. In this exercise. 24 In the Save As dialog. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. click the Training Files icon. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler.22 Click OK. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Open the m Creating Piping Systems. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. In the next exercise. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. analyses cannot be performed. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. Thus. Unlike logical connections (systems).

Notice that after you click .Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. all other components are unavailable. (Select Equipment for System). right-click. and select the boiler to assign it to the Notice that you can select only valid system components. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. 6 On the Options Bar. All level 2 radiators display in red. 7 On the Options Bar. click supply system. and click Select All Instances. 138 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

you create the return piping system. Creating the Piping Systems | 139 . So. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. Thus. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. Notice that is does not display. The organization is from upstream. press Tab. Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. right-click. Next. and select the system.The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. and select the boiler to assign it to the return system. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. This is because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. click . the boiler (the parent) to downstream. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. This display indicates that the new system is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. and click Select to select the system. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators.

and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. 17 If you want to save your work. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. 13 Right-click each category. or even without pipe being drawn. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. click File menu ➤ Save. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. and click Select. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). expand Piping. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. These listings represent the systems that you just created. 15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. in the next exercise. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. 140 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. 18 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems.11 The return system displays in red TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. and cleared from the Options Bar. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. and click Save.

1 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. In a later exercise. and click OK. and double-click 2 . Notice that all components that are in the 2 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Pipe Runs | 141 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. click the Training Files icon. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators.Piping to make it the active view.Piping view range highlight. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. click Check None. 4 In the Filter box.Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. and then select Mechanical Equipment. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. Open the m Creating Pipe Runs.

(You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 .Piping view) TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 7 Click OK. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 142 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). then the Select a System dialog will open. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. 6 In the Select a System dialog. select Hydronic Supply 1. Notice that the radiators. the boiler. you can place the cursor over a radiator. click Layout Path. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. Then.The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). The system displays in red. You will need to select a system to create the layout. 5 On the Options Bar.

The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. Later in this exercise. 8 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 9 On the Options Bar. ■ Verify that 0. Enter -375mm for Offset. you create the supply pipe run 300mm from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. It does not reference the architecture. 12 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. Next. 10 On the Options Bar.00° is specified for Slope. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. Creating Pipe Runs | 143 . You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. ■ Enter 300 for Inset. Using this inset. click Settings. verify that Main is selected. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. 11 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ Click (Next Solution). You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. verify that Solutions is selected. and select solution 5.

This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 3275mm in the level 1 plenum space. zoom the view. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 15 Click OK. Enter -375 for Offset. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. 13 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you now modify the layout path. select Branch. For more information. and other obstacles. 17 In the drawing area. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. structural beams. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 144 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. The layout path is located under the radiators. or architecture. click Modify. 14 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 16 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. duct. refer to Help.

18 Using the drag control.A drag control displays. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as layout path. Creating Pipe Runs | 145 .

Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. select a different layout solution. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. or manually modify the pipe. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings are automatically inserted. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. 20 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and is not part of the system. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. Either relocate the system components. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. For example. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. 146 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Finish Layout.19 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning.

The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. To turn off hidden lines. If a pipe is hidden by an object. This is caused by the hidden line setting.Change the geometry display 21 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 6. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. select Fine for Detail Level. Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. 22 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). Creating Pipe Runs | 147 . In the Mechanical Settings dialog.

Next. So. 148 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. and click to select them. 25 Place the cursor over the pipe. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. Medium for 2-line duct display. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. Additionally. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design.23 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. Modify the pipe run 24 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. select Coarse for single line display. On the View Control Bar. Instead of moving the pipe. The design requires 2 zones. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run.

29 On the Options Bar.26 Press Delete to delete the selection. the logical connection (or system) is still intact. 27 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click to select it. Creating Pipe Runs | 149 . select 25mm for D: (diameter). and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. Next. you modify the supply pipe run diameter. 28 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). and click Modify on the Design Bar.

IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. width. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. Check connectivity 32 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. the diameter would not display. 30 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops.The diameter of the main and branches change to 25mm. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 31 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. The first time you press Tab. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. press Tab 3 times. Next. fittings. If the entire network does not highlight. If the pipes had different diameters. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. and equipment. 33 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. 150 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. then you know that a disconnect exists. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.

You need to correct the disconnect. This disconnect caused the no auto-route solution warning message to display after creating the piping layout. This allows you to better see disconnects. Creating Pipe Runs | 151 . Correct a piping disconnect 35 Zoom in on the radiator in Office 8 located in the lower-left corner. 34 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. you can click to select them. Notice that the lower-left radiator did not highlight or display in red indicating that it is disconnected.

36 Zoom in on the upper-right elbow. Notice that 2 plus signs and 2 connectors display. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. and select it. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. You need to correct this disconnect by converting an elbow fitting to a tee and then drawing pipe to connect to the tee fitting.Notice that the branch did not connect to the main when the pipe run was created. Each control converts the elbow fitting into a tee fittings but with either a vertical or horizontal orientation. These plus signs are fitting conversion controls. You may need to zoom the view closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. These controls convert the selected fitting to the next possible fitting for the piping context. 37 Click the plus sign located to the left. 152 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting. TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. 38 Click the tee fitting. A minus sign displays. Creating Pipe Runs | 153 . 39 Click the minus sign to convert back to the elbow fitting. 40 Click the elbow fitting.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. and click the right plus sign.

The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. The Draw tool activates enabling you to create pipe. 44 Place the cursor over the end of the tee fitting. click to specify the pipe segment start point. click Pipe. Notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. You can now draw the pipe to connect the radiator to the supply pipe run. and after the fitting end point snap displays. Draw pipe to correct disconnects 41 Zoom out the view to display the disconnected pipe segment and the tee fitting. select Pipe Types : Standard. 42 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 154 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 43 In the Type Selector.

NOTE When drawing pipe. you specify a start point then move the cursor to create the pipe segment. .TIP When using the Draw tool to create pipe. Creating Pipe Runs | 155 . and then specify an end point. and after the connector snap displays. you can press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and begin drawing. to locate a connector and create the connection. If you pause briefly. If drawing contiguous segments. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. a connection may not occur. TIP When drawing pipe. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. Remember to always check connectivity after drawing the pipe segment. This automatically specifies the pipe diameter and offset (elevation) to match that of the selected start point object. click to specify the segment end point. 45 Move the cursor down toward the tee to begin drawing the pipe. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. 46 Continue drawing the pipe segment down toward the tee fitting. use the connector snap. the end point of current segment will be the start point of the next segment. and press Spacebar to match the offset (-375) and diameter (25mm) to that of the selected tee connector. If you do not use the connector snap. you did not begin drawing before pressing Spacebar Note that although the diameter and offset are specified automatically.

you validate the pipe geometry. The pipe branch including the tee fitting highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 51 On the View toolbar. 50 On the View Options Bar. use the Zoom. Scroll. 52 In the Dynamic View dialog. 156 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Validate the pipe geometry 49 In the Project Browser. 48 Place the cursor over the pipe segment. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 47 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. specify the Detail Level to Fine to display the pipes in 2-line. click (Dynamically Modify View). and Spin buttons to verify that the level 2 supply pipe run geometry is as you expected. Next. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. and press TAB twice to check connectivity.The pipe segment is created connecting the radiator to the supply pipe run.

you create the return pipe run. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. and enter -525mm for both the main and branch offsets. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. Remember. Enter 600 for Inset. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run.Piping view. ■ In the Layout Path tool. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. Create the level 2 return pipe run 53 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Pipe Runs | 157 . Verify that 0. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. Use the same method to correct any disconnects.Next.00° is specified for Slope. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. For pipe conversion settings. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space. Select Perimeter solution 3.

and click Save.The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. corrected disconnects. Open the m Resolving Pipe Interference. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the next exercise. In this exercise. In this exercise. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. 54 If you want to save your work. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. click the Training Files icon. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. You checked connectivity. click File menu ➤ Save. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 55 In the Save As dialog. 158 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . converted fittings. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. The first click specifies the section head.Piping to make it the active view. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. and double-click 2 . Adding a section view is a 2-click process. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. After you add the section. Resolving Pipe Interference | 159 .1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. and click to specify the section head location. and the second click specifies the section tail. Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell (Conference Room 31). Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. click Section. click Zoom in Region.

A new section view named Section 4 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. 160 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.

The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. under Graphics. The section relocates under Piping. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections.NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. click Modify. and click OK. right-click Section 4. Resolving Pipe Interference | 161 . 7 On the Design Bar. The section head and tail display. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 4 view. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select Fine for Detail Level. 11 On the View Control Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). select Piping for Sub Discipline. and click Properties. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. 8 In the Project Browser.

They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. place the cursor over the top connector. and other aspects of your systems design. mechanical equipment placement. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell.Piping to make it the active view. 162 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. Next. and after the connectors display.

The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe.These connectors connect to the tee fittings. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. 18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. release the mouse button to reconnect it. Resolving Pipe Interference | 163 . and after the fitting end point snap displays.

21 On the Edit toolbar.NOTE When modifying pipe. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to 3000mm above the bottom pipe segment connector as shown. and click to split the pipe at 2160mm from the supply pipe segment connector above. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. 164 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click (Split). always connect to pipe segments. 19 Zoom out. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. and select the return pipe segment again. If you split the pipe. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. fittings. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. you split the supply pipe segment. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. Next.

and press Delete to delete it. and draw the pipe around the stairs. and split the supply pipe segment 1400mm from the bottom pipe segment connector. Zoom out the view. Next. Resolving Pipe Interference | 165 . 25 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. you convert a tee fitting. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. 24 With the Split tool open. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. 27 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. move the cursor down. 26 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase.

Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. and move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. and after the end point connector snap displays. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left.28 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned in the previous lesson. 32 Zoom out the view. 166 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 29 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. convert the tee fitting from a vertical orientation to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. 31 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted.

always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. NOTE When drawing pipe. and after the connector snap displays. Resolving Pipe Interference | 167 .34 Draw the pipe down. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. click to specify the segment end point. 35 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment.

and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 168 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 37 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. 38 Right-click the lower connector. 36 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool.The return pipe run is connected as shown. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. This activates the Draw tool.

40 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. click to specify the move start point. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. Notice that the pipe segment is routed in the stairwell wall. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. or width and height. Second. This needs to be corrected. the pipe diameter. specify the move destination or end point. First. Resolving Pipe Interference | 169 . However. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. click (Move). and offset automatically match that of the selected connector.39 In the Type Selector. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. 44 Place the cursor over the pipe segment and after the centerline snap displays. 42 Click the pipe segment to select it. 43 On the Edit toolbar. Move a pipe segment to correct a routing issue 41 Zoom on the top horizontal pipe segment. specify the reference or start point of the object that you want to move. IMPORTANT Using the Move tool is a 2-click process.

This moves the pipe segment up 100mm away from the wall but still allowing space for sizing.45 Move the cursor up. Notice that the adjacent pipe segments and fittings parametrically adjust to the move but the rest of the pipe run and the radiators remain unchanged. The interference has been resolved. enter100. 46 Place the cursor over each pipe run and press TAB twice to check connectivity. Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 47 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). 170 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and after the listening dimensions appear. Each pipe run and their respective tee fittings highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you confirm and resolve pipe interference with the left staircase. and press ENTER to specify the move end point. Next.

48 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. click (Split). and split the supply pipe at 3600mm from its left connector. 50 On the View Control Bar. select Fine for Detail Level. Otherwise. 55 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. 57 Using the methods that you learned. Resolving Pipe Interference | 171 . 52 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. 56 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 1500mm from its left connector. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. watch the listening dimensions.Piping to make it the active view. 51 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. you may get a false positive result. Although this section was used for air systems. 49 Press ESC. 54 On the Edit toolbar.The section displays in red. and double-click the section head to open the section view. 53 Zoom in on the stairwell. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. and adjust the view clip planes as shown.

You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. Remember to watch for connector snaps. 172 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 58 Again. using the methods that you learned.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. and click Save. Connecting the Boiler | 173 . Open the m Connecting Boiler. Using these 2 methods. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Draw. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. Remember that after you create pipe. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. preferably a connector snap. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). click the Training Files icon. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. the start point. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. diameter (or width and height). 1 In the Project Browser. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. Then.59 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. you used the Split. and offset are automatically specified. 60 If you want to save your work. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. 61 In the Save As dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. (2) Connect to a snap. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. In the next exercise. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. click File menu ➤ Save. Using Create Similar. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. the pipe type is also matched.

Note that if this option is unavailable. 3 In the Project Browser.Piping to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. and double-click 2 . 174 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. TIP When tiling 2 views. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. the active view is tiled to the left. the active view is the only open window.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view.This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. You will design in the 2 .

click to specify the first pipe segment start point. 10 In the Type Selector. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. ■ Verify that Angle is cleared. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 2150mm from level 1.8 Zoom in on the boiler. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the boiler connector offset is at -2176. This negative offset is based on level 2 because you are designing in the level 2 view. watch the listening dimensions. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the left. Enter -1500 for Offset. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. and after the connector snap displays.8mm. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at 460mm from the boiler connection. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. Connecting the Boiler | 175 . verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. click Pipe.

enter -375 for Offset. and click to specify the end point. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). click to specify the pipe segment end point. 3275mm from level 1. TIP When drawing pipe. 16 On the Options Bar. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar.) to separate snap increments. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. 15 Draw the pipe up to 900mm. In a later exercise. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. 176 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . after listening dimensions display. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. 17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. zoom the view and try again. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment.

and after the connector snap displays. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors.The boiler supply connector pipe is created. release the mouse button to connect to it. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Connecting the Boiler | 177 . 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe.

23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. 178 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. convert the elbow to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. and click it. Connecting the Boiler | 179 . you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run.Next. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 24 With the windows tiled. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. 27 In the 3D Piping view. click the tee to display the connectors. 26 Using the fitting conversion method that you learned.Piping view to make it active. 29 Zoom in on the tee. right-click the right connector. 28 Click in the 2 .

and after listening dimensions display. enter -375 for Offset. In a later exercise. 180 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 30 In the Type Selector. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. connect the right supply pipe run.The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 36 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. click to specify the end point. enter 900 and press Enter. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 34 On the Options Bar. 35 With the Draw tool activated. 33 Draw the pipe up. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. Verify that -1500 is specified for Offset. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. This creates a 900mm pipe segment. Verify that Angle is cleared. and the start point is automatically specified. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point. 37 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run.

38 Check connectivity. Connecting the Boiler | 181 .The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 39 Validate the pipe geometry.

This places the return connection 250mm above level 1. and the 2 . and that Auto Connect is selected. zoom in on the boiler.Piping the active view. 41 Select the boiler. 46 Draw the pipe up from the boiler 600mm. 182 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and enter 150 and press Enter. verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter). and right-click the return connector. you draw a 150mm pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 43 On the Options Bar. Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 40 With the windows tiled. enter -525 for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1. and click to specify the end point. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -3396mm from level 2. 42 In the Type Selector. 44 Move the cursor up. Next. 45 On the Options Bar.Next. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run.

This routing situation provides an opportunity to learn more about the Auto Connect behavior. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. you draw the return pipe to the left. If Auto Connect is not selected.Next. Connecting the Boiler | 183 . Make certain that the 2 . click to specify the end point. Auto Connect is available on the Options Bar only when the Draw tool is active. IMPORTANT Auto Connect allows you to connect an object that you are drawing to an object that is located on a different level or plane. the left return pipe is routed under the supply pipe. an automatic connection is made. It is important that Auto Connect is not selected. verify that Auto Connect is selected. As you draw. 47 On the Options Bar.Piping and 3D Piping views are tiled to clearly view the Auto Connect behavior. If Auto Connect is selected and your selection point overlaps an object on a different level or plane. the connection is not made. 48 Draw a pipe segment to the left and under the supply pipe.

click to specify the end point. draw the pipe to the left and under the supply pipe. 184 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and the pipe is automatically connected to the supply pipe above. and right-click the top connector. clear Auto Connect. 50 Press CTRL+Z to undo the connection and return to the pipe segment. You see it clearly in the 3D view. 49 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw tool.Notice that a green pipe riser symbol displays in the floor plan view. 52 On the Options Bar. 53 Again. 51 Select the return pipe segment. and click Draw Pipe. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.

This is caused by the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. In the floor plan view. Connecting the Boiler | 185 . and twice to deactivate the Draw tool. 56 Draw the pipe to the left. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. right-click the left connector and click Draw Pipe. press ESC to deactivate the tool. To turn off hidden lines. press it once to stop drawing the current object. select Hidden Line. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings).Notice that this time the pipe did not connect to the supply pipe above and a green pipe riser symbol did not display. you finish connecting the boiler to both return pipe runs. click the specify the end point. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. On an open pipe segment or run. 54 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. You now have a better understanding of the Auto Connect. notice that part of the return pipe is hidden as it passes under the supply pipe. TIP When drawing pipe. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. If the pipe segment or run is closed. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. 55 Select the return pipe segment. and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. Next. press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. If a pipe is hidden by an object.

and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. 60 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. 186 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 59 Zoom in on the boiler. 58 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.57 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. click to connect to the left return pipe run. The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. and after the connector snap displays.

and click to specify the end point. 63 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. right-click the right connector. and click Draw Pipe.61 Select the tee fitting. Connecting the Boiler | 187 . 62 Draw the pipe 300mm to the right. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. click to specify the end point.

drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. 188 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 65 Click Modify on the Design Bar.64 Using the method that you learned. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 66 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting.

Next. and adjust the view as shown. you create a section view to verify the clearance between the return pipe riser and the boiler. draw a section view. Connecting the Boiler | 189 .67 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. 68 Using the section view creation method that you learned.

72 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 74 Zoom on the boiler return pipe to validate the pipe geometry and check the clearance between the pipe riser and the boiler. 71 Right-click in the drawing area. 73 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. select Piping for Sub-Discipline.69 Click Modify on the Design Bar. under Graphics. 70 In the Project Browser. click Fine for Detail Level. 190 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click View Properties. This locates the Section 5 view under Piping in the Project Browser and removes the ??? label. You can also double-click the section head to open the section view. double-click Section 5 to open the Section 5 view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections.

click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. Next. First. If the Tools toolbar is not available. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. 78 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe.75 Close the Section 5 view but keep the 2 tiled views open. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. click (Align). you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. select the reference point where you want to align. 77 On the Tools toolbar.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. in the 2 .Piping view. Connecting the Boiler | 191 . and after highlights. and then you select the point to align. click to specify the alignment reference point. 76 With the 2 .

79 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. 192 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and after the centerline highlights. click to specify the point to align.NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return.

Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts. 80 Using the alignment method you just learned.The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. 81 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool. align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 193 .

This is because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that we aligned. 82 Place the cursor below the tee fitting. 194 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the return pipe runs also parametrically adjusted. 83 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.The aligned return pipes are as shown.

rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you size the supply and return piping runs. and click Save. 84 If you want to save your work. Next. you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. and click to select them. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser.Piping to make it the active view. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. click the Training Files icon. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 195 . enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name. 85 In the Save As dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the m Pipe Sizing .Friction & Velocity.The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. In the next exercise. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler. connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. click File menu ➤ Save. Finally. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. navigate to the folder of your choice. and after it highlights. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. and double-click 2 .

click Sizing.00 Pa/m. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. select Friction. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog.5 m/s for Velocity. and that Restrict Size is cleared. Under Constraints. select a different layout solution. and enter 2. 196 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. The sized pipe runs are sized. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing. Either relocate the system components. 3 On the Options Bar. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. ■ Click OK. or manually modify the pipe. Select And. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and enter 250.The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing. you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. In the next exercise.Friction & Velocity Training for File name. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry. you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. click File menu ➤ Save. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. navigate to the folder of your choice. Placing Circulator Pumps | 197 . and click Save. you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Placing Circulator Pumps In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. enter Pipe Sizing .Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. 8 If you want to save your work. 9 In the Save As dialog.

This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. 3 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. Note that if this option is unavailable. the active view is tiled to the left. Open the m Placing Circulator Pumps. 198 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP When tiling 2 views.Piping to make it the active view. the active view is the only open window.Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. You place the pumps in the 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 . Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active.Piping view. click the Training Files icon. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and double-click 2 . 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits.7 On the Edit toolbar. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted. 14 Place the cursor over to the left of the pipe opening. click to place the circulator pump. Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. The selected pipe segment displays in red. click (Split). 13 In the Type Selector. Placing Circulator Pumps | 199 . and after the centerline snap displays. 15 Move the cursor over the pipe opening. 9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. and make 2 splits on the left pipe 160mm from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown. and press Spacebar to rotate the pump. select M_In-line Circulator : M_Standard. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. click Mechanical Equipment.

200 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You can also use the Move tool for precise placement. drag the pump away from the pipe. and watch for the centerline snaps. 17 In the 3D Piping view. notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.TIP If you want to reposition the circulator pump. and then move it over the pipe opening. 16 Press ESC twice.

release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump. The selected pump displays in red. Placing Circulator Pumps | 201 . click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. To clear the selection. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. click the pipe segment.Piping view.Piping view. If the pump remains selected. 21 Click OK. 18 In the 2 . 23 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump. and select Element Properties. under Constraints. You can also right-click the pump. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset. the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. click the pump. click . TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. 19 On the Options Bar. and after the connector snap displays. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. click in the drawing area to clear the selection. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. You need to specify the pump offset. or press ESC. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment. click Modify on the Design Bar. Next. you connect the pump. enter -1500 for Offset. you can click in the drawing area.Actually. 22 In the 2 .

and press TAB. After connecting the pump. 24 Press ESC to clear the selection. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 26 Place the cursor over the pump. you need to check connectivity. 202 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. 25 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

29 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view. Placing Circulator Pumps | 203 . Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top. 28 With the 2 . Next.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. and check connectivity. 27 Using the methods that you just learned. connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe.

30 Click the left pump to display rotation controls. 31 Click the rotation control on the right. 32 Using the method that you just learned. 204 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

System tools display on the Options Bar.The in-line circulator pumps are rotated. These unassigned components are located in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. 34 In the System Browser. and so on) that you placed to a system. you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment. Placing Circulator Pumps | 205 . they move to their respective system folder. After you assign the components to a system. do the following: ■ ■ Expand the Unassigned folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. Assign the pumps to the supply system 33 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. You can also press F9. Immediately after placement. Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. select the left supply pipe riser. Expand the Piping folder. click System Browser. right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system. 35 In the 3D Piping view. As you learned in previous exercises. Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder.

you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. and click Save. 36 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. and by clicking the rotation controls. you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. boilers and AC units. you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. click Add To System. navigate to the folder of your choice. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. such as VAV boxes. 41 In the Save As dialog. Finally. 37 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar. click (Edit System). pressure. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. click File menu ➤ Save. If you use this tool. 206 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. 40 If you want to save your work. the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder.TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. 38 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system. NOTE Do not click . You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow. click Finish System. you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure. Using the System Inspector. 39 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Inspecting Piping Systems In this exercise.

After the System Inspector activates. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Right-click in the view. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. click (Inspect). and click OK. select Hydronic Supply 1. and pressure information including pressure loss. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A tooltip also displays this system information. NOTE To select a system. 1 In the Project Browser. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Open the m Inspecting Piping Systems. and so on that you have assigned to a system. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. and click Inspect from the context menu. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number. 6 In the Select a System dialog. Right-click a system from the System Browser. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 5 On the Options Bar. System tools appear on the Options Bar. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 2 . The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Piping to make it the active view. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. select any pipe segment. System tools display on the Options Bar. 4 Select the boiler. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. fitting. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. Inspecting Piping Systems | 207 . IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler. mechanical equipment. click Inspect. flow.

208 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. also known as the critical path. notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump. As you inspect. and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. Next. you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information.

and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps. 18 In the Save As dialog. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. In this exercise. and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. 15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. you need to validate them. In the next exercise. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. double-click the 3D Piping view. In this exercise. and click Save. click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. flow. and quickly target those systems that need attention. and inspect a fin-tube radiator. click File menu ➤ Save. Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. and for pipe sizing. 16 Using the methods that you learned. You also compared system information across a system. you check the piping systems. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project.11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Checking Piping Systems | 209 . 17 If you want to save your work. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name. you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction. navigate to the folder of your choice.

210 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. double-click the 2 . you confirm the system component assignments. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty. and for pipe sizing. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. click Check Duct Systems.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. thus assigning the components to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Open the m Checking Piping Systems. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. After you assign the system components to a system. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system. Next. However. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators. the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. click Check Pipe Systems. you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. right-click the Design Bar. For example. Next. check system warnings may occur. and click Piping.Piping to make it the active view. As a tutorial exercise. If the System Browser does not respond.” 4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. click in the drawing area to make it active. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. In the System Browser. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). A message appears indicating the no warning were found. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Warnings display. you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. The piping system is logically and physically valid. then press F9. the pipe is now associated with that system. Then. click the Training Files icon. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.

Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler. 9 Right-click Default Return Air. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. TIP If you have multiple views open. you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. and click Expand All. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. click Close. fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . you confirm the piping system assignments. collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply. The red lines represent the default logical connection. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 12 In the System Browser. double-click 2 Mech to make it the active view. and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components. The supply system that you created. 6 In the Project Browser. otherwise. 10 Using the same methods.Because you assigned all piping components. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems.Piping to make it the active view. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number. Checking Piping Systems | 211 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system.

The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. and section views. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. specify 2975mm for the supply and 2825mm for the return pipe offset elevation. For pipe offset. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. 212 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. The completed mechanical systems are included in the m Completed Mechanical Systems. parametrically modify those designs. 3D. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. 16 If you want to save your work. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. In the lesson.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. In this exercise. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. navigate to the folder of your choice. Depending on your air systems design. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 17 In the Save As dialog. and click Save.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. circulator pumps. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. and fin-tube radiators. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. a boiler. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 15 Using the methods that you learned. click File menu ➤ Save. In this tutorial. Explore different system designs. the creation and modification methods remained the same. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe connections and creating logical systems. Design the system in the 1 . To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. it is a valid system without problems. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2008. For additional practice. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. Finally.

However. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 213 . You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you learn to create electrical systems within the architectural model of a building project. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. you can choose to save your work.Electrical Systems 3 In this tutorial. go to http://www. If the tutorial datasets are not present. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory.

then applying the appropriate template to each plan. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in rooms are above the ceiling level. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. analyze. For this reason. and prepare the electrical views that you will need to design the electrical system for your project. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures.rvt. 3 Click Wiring Types. wiring. apply templates to your views. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. and modify your lighting and electrical systems in later exercises. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Value CU-THWN Copper 75 214 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Later. For example. The lighting and power plans are created by copying and renaming architectural views. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. By creating views that are specific to the electrical system you will be able to design. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. and click Add. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. and in the right pane. create views for the power and lighting systems at each level in the building.Planning Electrical Systems In this lesson you specify electrical settings. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. and demand factors that you will use in your project. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. in the left pane. in the Element Properties dialog for Rooms. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. distribution systems. You will create the following views for Level 1 and Level 2: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. click the Training Files icon. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. expand Wiring. the Limit Offset. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. The electrical settings determine the voltages. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Electrical Views. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. power distribution systems. has been set to 2300 mm for the building used with these exercises. wiring.

00 V Minimum 110. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.00 V 200. By specifying a range. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V.Parameter Insulation Max Size Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value THWN 500 1.00 V 480. click Voltage Definitions.00 V 490.00 V Maximum 130. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.00 V 208.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view. For example.00 V 260.00 V 280. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 277 480 Value 120.00 V 277.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 215 .00 V 460. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.00 V 220.

verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 480/277 Wye Phase Three Three Configuration Wye Wye Wires 4 4 L-L 208 480 L-G 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. 9 Click Demand Factors. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. 216 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 8 In the right pane. Red. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. this type of system (High. even though this is physically impossible. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click Distribution Systems. For example.

A new view called Copy of Level 1 is created. Create views for your electrical plans 11 In the Project Browser.000VA. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. enter 1-Power. create another copy of level 1. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load.000VA. and click Rename. leave the default settings as shown here. Create 2 copies of the level 2 floor plan. and rename it 1-Lighting. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. right-click Level 1. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. and rename them as follows: ■ ■ 2-Power 2-Lighting Preparing the Electrical Plan | 217 . For this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 12 Right-click Copy of Level 1.000VA 3. 13 In the Rename View dialog. For example. ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 14 Using the same method. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. or Other systems in your project based on their load.Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. 10 Click OK.000VA 10.000VA 10. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. HVAC. at any given time. for Name. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. and click OK. Power.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range.

expand Ceiling Plans. 18 Repeat the previous 3 steps to create a 2-Ceiling Elec ceiling plan. 22 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. expand Electrical ➤ Devices. Now that you have created views specifically for electrical information. Lighting Plan. and click OK. and click OK. which are available from view templates. The templates also specify the sub-discipline for each view. Load component families 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 In the Project Browser. and Electrical Ceiling templates that you will apply to your new views control the visibility of component categories. and click Rename. 30 In the Project Browser. select the following families: ■ ■ M_Lighting Switches. 20 In the Select View Template dialog. Apply templates to views Each of the templates that you will apply to your new views specify Electrical for the view discipline.Create views for your electrical ceiling plans Ceiling grid patterns (only visible in ceiling plans) let you correctly lay out lighting fixtures. and click Apply View Template. which places the view under the Electrical branch in the project browser. The Power Plan. select Power Plan from the list of templates. right-click 1-Lighting.rfa 29 Click Open. you need to apply settings. click Lighting Plan. 218 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . The 1-Power view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. View templates let you easily control view properties. In the following steps you will create a ceiling plan for each level by copying and renaming the ceiling plans that the architect has already created. 23 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Open dialog. right-click Level 1. and causes the architectural components to be dimmed in the view. apply the Lighting Plan template to the 2-Lighting view. and the view range. and click Apply View Template. 16 Right-click Copy of Level 1. 17 In the Rename View dialog. apply the Power Plan template to 2-Power. and click OK. expand Families. 25 Using the same method. 28 While pressing Ctrl. 15 In the Project Browser. The 1-Ceiling Elec view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Ceiling ➤ Ceiling Plans branch in the project browser. the view discipline. and click Apply View Template. The 1-Lighting view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. enter 1-Ceiling Elec for Name. and apply the Electrical Ceiling Plan template to the 2-Ceiling Elec view.rfa M_Receptacle. 21 In the Project Browser. which further defines their position in the project browser. select Electrical Ceiling from the list of templates. right-click 1-Power. and click OK. TIP The Select View Template dialog can also be accessed from the View menu. 24 In the Select View Template dialog. right-click 1-Ceiling Elec.

selected components for your electrical systems. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of rooms (offices.Notice that an Electrical Fixtures ➤ M_Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. In this exercise. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.rfa 32 Open the Electrical folder again and load the M_Troffer Corner Insert. click the Training Files icon. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the rooms within your project. Under Parameter Data. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . containing several switch types. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. “Defining Required Lighting Levels” on page 219. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of rooms in your project. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. conference rooms. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. click Add. and load the following electrical families from the Equipment folder: ■ ■ ■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers. In this case the key style is the type of room and. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rfa M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Lighting Levels. As you loaded each of the component families. voltages. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 219 . Later. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. has also been added under Lighting Device. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.Surface.rfa electrical family from the Lighting Fixtures folder. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type.rvt. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. distribution systems. as described below.Surface. reopen the Electrical folder. and established the parameters for your wiring. A Lighting Devices ➤ M_Lighting Switches folder. 33 You can save the open file if you wish. and so on). Open the provided dataset. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. 31 Using the same method. restrooms. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. and demand factors. in the Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Group. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . there are many rooms in this project that have similar lighting requirements. ■ Click Schedule keys. For Name. Under Categories. double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. enter Room Lighting Requirements. 7 On the Options Bar. and when the cross-hairs display. However. move the cursor over the room in the upper-left corner. select Illuminance. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each room. 8 Click Cancel. For Type. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on room type. To verify this. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. select Electrical-Lighting. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. select Rooms. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. The new parameter you have just created applies to all rooms in the project. you can look at the properties for one of the rooms. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Rooms for Category. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Rooms under Electrical-Lighting in the Room Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). 4 Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. Select Instance. 220 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click to select the room. select Electrical.Lighting category. In the Element Properties dialog.

one for each type of room in the building. The new rows are added with 1 through 7 as the default Key Names. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). click New 7 times to add 7 rows in the key schedule. according to the values in the following table: Room Type Private Office Open Office Lounge Restroom Conference Mech/Elec Stair/Circulation Lighting Level (lx) 325 540 270 325 375 215 215 When completed. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each room type. 12 Click OK. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the Room component. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. the Key Schedule should looks like this: Defining Required Lighting Levels | 221 . The key schedule displays in the drawing area. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.■ For Key Name. enter Lighting Levels. Enter a room type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of rooms in the project. ■ Click OK.

the value that you entered for this room type in the key schedule. Office). While pressing Ctrl. then right-click one of the selections. click . You can change the sort keys for the schedule. Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Number 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name Open 1 Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Stairwell Office Office Office Key Name Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 222 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . right-click in the Room Lighting Requirements schedule. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected rooms. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. and for Lighting Level parameter. under Instance Parameters. the Level 1 floor plan would be thought of as the architect’s view. NOTE Generally. For tutorial purposes. then right-click. 17 Move the cursor over the room until a cross-hair displays. 21 Using the same method. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining rooms in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple rooms of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog. 20 Click OK. scroll down to the Identity Data category.TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. select multiple rooms of the same type (for example. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 540 lx. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 19 Scroll up to the Electrical . and click Element Properties. The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Room Lighting Requirements key schedule. 16 Zoom in on the large open area in the center of the floor plan.Lighting category. in the Element Properties dialog. In a worksharing environment. and other users would not be able to perform operations covered in this exercise. click Properties and. Assign room keys to the rooms in the project 15 In the Project Browser. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. In the Project Browser. this view might well be part of a workset checked out by the architect. and select Open Office. assume you would have full access to this view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to rooms based on specific room parameters. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the rooms in your project. if required.Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Number 19 20 21 2 6 7 8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Name Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical/Electrical Open 2 Office Office Office Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical / Electrical Lounge Office Office Office Office Stairwell Conference Room Office Office Key Name Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise you will create a room color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values according to room type. For example. selecting a room type for your new Room Variables parameter in a room’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. Consequently. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels | 223 . Room color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the room components. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. you could create a key schedule named Room Variables. as described below. and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component. Room color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. “Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels” on page 223. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the provided dataset.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Element Properties. and click OK. and place it in the drawing. select Required Lighting . The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Title. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 224 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . for the Color. Under Title Text. 6 For Color. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Click OK twice. enter Required Lighting Levels. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. enter Required Lighting. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Color Fills. click the Training Files icon. select Required Lighting Level. for Name. select Show Title. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click OK. and click (Duplicate). and click OK. select Underline. select Rooms for Category. click Edit/New. and click OK. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. click Color Scheme Legend. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Required Lighting Level. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan.

16 Make the Level 2 floor plan the active view. 17 Using the same method, activate the color scheme as you did for Level 1. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. You can have more than one color scheme in the project, but only one per plan. 18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for rooms, or for any parameter that you want to create for a room (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels
In this exercise you create a room lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each room against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project, you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/- 55 lx range specified in the schedule. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Schedule Lighting Requirements.rvt.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 225

Create room lighting analysis schedule
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Rooms. For Name, enter Room Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Click OK.

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane

Create a new schedule parameter
4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog, click Calculated Value. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, enter Average Estimated Illumination - Required Lighting Level.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:
■ ■ ■

For Sort by, select Number. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

8 On the Formatting tab, under fields, select Lighting Delta. 9 Click Conditional Format. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Field, select Lighting Delta. For Test, select Not Between. For Value, enter -55 lx and 55 lx in the text boxes.

226 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

11 Click the Background Color chip. 12 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, click the red color chip. 13 Click OK twice. 14 On the Formatting tab, under Fields, select Ceiling Reflectance, and click Field Format. 15 In the Format dialog:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use default settings. For Units, verify that Fixed is selected. For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.

16 Click OK. 17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. 18 Click OK.

19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next lesson, “Designing the Electrical System” on page 228. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the rooms as 0. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the rooms. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each room, and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. This is because the value is not within the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 227

Designing the Electrical System
In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices, electrical equipment, and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Once the equipment is in place, you will create power and lighting circuits, and make connections to electrical equipment.

Adding Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. As you select and place lighting fixtures, the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each room’s lighting requirement. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Adding Lighting Fixtures.rvt.

Place the initial lighting fixture
1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules, and double-click Room Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column, and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance, Wall Reflectance, Floor Reflectance, and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. Only the Number, Name, Average Estimated Lighting, and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 4 On the Windows menu, click Close Hidden Windows. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 6 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 1-Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid, and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.

228 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

8 In the 1-Ceiling Elec view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Light Fixture. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3 Lamp, and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 11 With the cursor in the room in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.

12 Click Modify. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).

14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays, click to specify the start point.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 229

15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture, and click when Intersection displays.

In the Room Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for room 3 is changed from -325 lx to -118 lx, closer to the required +/- 55 lx. The current line weight settings for the lighting fixture and ceiling grid make it difficult to distinguish the outline of the lighting fixture from the ceiling grid lines. Adjusting the line weight for the lighting fixtures will make it easier to place the remaining lighting fixtures.

Change line weight to adjust lighting fixture visibility
16 Right-click anywhere on the view background, and click View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Reflected Ceiling Plan: 1-Ceiling Elec dialog, scroll down to Lighting Fixtures, click in the Projection/Surface-Lines column, and click Override. 19 In the Line Graphics dialog, under Lines, for Weight, select 5. 20 Click OK 3 times.

230 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

The fixture you placed now displays as shown.

Copy and place additional lighting fixtures
21 Select the lighting fixture, and on the Toolbar, click 22 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. 23 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of the level 1, as shown. (Copy).

Check the illumination levels against the Room Lighting Analysis schedule
24 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 231

The Average Estimated Illumination for rooms 3, 4 and 5 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 325 lx, but is still not within the +/- 55 lx range, so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these rooms.

To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each room with a 2-lamp fixture. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.

Change lighting fixture type
25 In the 1-Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each room, and in the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. If you select a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. 26 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.

The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/- 55 lx range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. 27 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1-Ceiling Elec and 2-Ceiling Elec views. Use the Room Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical rooms (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 are shown below along with the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

232 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 1

NOTE Ceiling grids were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical rooms; therefore, you cannot add lighting fixtures to these rooms.
Level 2

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 233

28 In the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, right-click one of the headings, and click Unhide All Columns.

With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms, your Lighting Delta column for all of the rooms should be white. 29 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 31 Proceed to the next exercise, “Placing Lighting Switches” on page 234. In this exercise, you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans, and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225.

Placing Lighting Switches
In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Switches.rvt.

Place switches in rooms
1 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 2 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 3 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole. 4 On the Options Bar, verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

5 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of room 3.

234 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the room as shown, and click to place the switch.

7 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining rooms in the 1-Lighting view as shown.
Level 1

8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way. 9 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 235

10 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

11 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Four Way. 12 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown.

236 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

13 In the open office area, place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.

14 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Lighting to make it the active view. 15 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way, and place a switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 237

16 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

17 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown.

238 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 2

18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Placing Power Receptacles” on page 239.

Placing Power Receptacles
In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Receptacles.rvt.

Place wall-hosted receptacles
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 4 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.

Placing Power Receptacles | 239

5 On the Options Bar, verify that

(Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

6 In the left side of the plan, place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.

7 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown, including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.

240 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

1-Power

2-Power

Placing Power Receptacles | 241

Place floor-hosted receptacles
8 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard. 11 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected for Plane.

NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected by default. 12 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as shown.

When placing a receptacle on a workplane, its connector is located below the level of the workplane. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures, it is important that the connector be within the Room to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. In the next steps, you will flip the workplane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the workplane. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles.

13 Select the receptacle and click the room). 14 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).

(Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the workplane (within

15 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. 16 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor, as shown.

242 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

17 Draw a pick box around the four floor-based receptacles, click , select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure, place 3 copies of the flipped receptacles throughout the Level 1 open office, as shown.

18 Using the same procedure, place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2-Power as shown. TIP You can select all of the floor hosted receptacles in the 1-Power view, then copy and paste them in the 2-Power view. Select all 1-Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard, open 2-Power, and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. 19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Placing Power Receptacles | 243

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports” on page 244. In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components, because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports
In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. With the introduction of local energy codes, the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces, you can refer to this report rather than having to measure rooms and count fixtures. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Usage Reports.rvt. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, scroll down the Category list, and select Rooms. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and for Name, enter Power & Lighting Usage. 4 Click OK. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area

6 Click OK. A schedule is created similar to the one shown.

244 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. and work toward the higher voltage. “Placing Electrical Equipment” on page 245. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Placing Electrical Equipment | 245 .7 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset: ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Open the provided dataset. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. as described below. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 9 Proceed to the next exercise.

select M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. select 480/277 Wye. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room between the 2 restrooms. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical room to the right of the panel as shown. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. Right-click the panel. click Element Properties. click Electrical Equipment.Surface : M_250A. select Electrical Equipment. and click to place the panel as shown. select M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : M_45kVA.Loads category. under Electrical . 9 Click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. and double-click 1-Power. click Modify and select the panel you just placed.rvt. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. for Distribution Sys. 246 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. scroll down to the Electrical . Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Electrical Equipment.Loads. and for Panel Name. 6 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. click . under Instance Parameters. Add a transformer 10 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar.

and place the panel to the right of the transformer. for Distribution Sys. 20 Select the panel you just placed. 19 Click Modify.Loads category. under Instance Parameters. scroll down to the Electrical . select 480/277 Wye. click .Loads category. enter L-1. under Instance Parameters. select Electrical Equipment. 23 Click OK. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. scroll down to the Electrical . select 120/208 Wye. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. and on the Options Bar. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. and for Panel Name. 14 On the Options Bar. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. For Panel Name. select M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 16 Click OK. click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter T1. for Distribution Sys. Since this is a transformer.Surface : M_100A. 21 On the Options Bar. Placing Electrical Equipment | 247 . select 120/208 Wye.

26 On the Options Bar.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. and click 30 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel.Surface : M_250A named H-2 M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: M_45kVA named T2 M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . . 29 Select the transformer T2. The temporary circuit displays as shown. select panel L-2. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. 27 Click (Select Panel). click (Create Power Circuit).Surface : M_100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. click . 248 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and select panel H-2 for Panel. In this case you are going to select something other than the panel. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit.

and click 39 Click . and select the T1 transformer as the panel. 37 Close the 2-Power view. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms side-by-side. Placing Electrical Equipment | 249 . click . click 35 On the Option Bar. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. . The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. . 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. 34 In the 2-Power view. select the H-2 panel. and select the MDP panel. select the L-1 panel.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. 38 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar.

click . Open the provided dataset. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and click 41 On the Options Bar.40 Select the T1 transformer. and data systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Power Circuitry. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. click the Training Files icon. 250 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .rvt. and select the MDP panel. 42 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. . 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. “Creating Power Circuitry” on page 250. as described below. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Circuits are used for power. lighting.

click . and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). and voltage (120 V). You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. select all the receptacles in the corner room. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner room. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. load (180 VA). leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. 3 While pressing Ctrl. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. For now. A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. Creating Power Circuitry | 251 .

click circuit. 8 On the Options Bar. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner room so that it is highlighted. 252 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. 10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. and click to select the circuit again. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the room. press Tab. and select panel L-1 as the panel for this NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 6 Click Modify.Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). and press Tab.

Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. click . 15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. 12 On the Edit Circuit tab on the Design Bar. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out.Loads category. and ground wiring. and add it to panel L-1. The currently specified values are 1-#12. neutral. select Circuit Properties. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. 1-#12. . The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. 1-#6. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. click Cancel Circuit. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. change the value from 20A to 50A. click . These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. and select panel L-1. click The circuit is created. 1-#12. and click Element Properties. Creating Power Circuitry | 253 . scroll down to the Electrical . 1-#10. 19 Close the warning message. click (Edit Circuit). and then scroll back down to Wire Size. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a room-by-room basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. and select panel L-1. 16 On the Design Bar.11 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. creating power circuits. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. under Instance Parameters. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. 22 Click OK. The editable parameters include Wire Type and Rating will be discussed in a later exercise. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. which are the wire sizes for the load. respectively for this circuit. When editing a circuit. If you select L-1 in the drawing.

26 Continue creating circuits. These will be connected in a later exercise. and then select panel L-1. 28 Double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. create circuits in the 2-Power view and assign them to panel L-2. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. 27 Using the same procedures. 29 Select the L-1 panel. 25 On the Options Bar. 254 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and on the Options Bar. click . as previously described. click . These will be connected in a later exercise. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown.24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. click (Edit Circuits on Panel).

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting. Open the provided dataset. as described below. 3 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. 30 Click OK. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click the Training Files icon. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. As you saw in the previous exercise.In the Edit Circuits dialog. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you have assigned only 17. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. “Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires” on page 255. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Finally. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits.rvt. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 2 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 255 .

7 Close the message window and. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 256 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 6 On the Options Bar.4 On the Options Bar. This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). click (Filter). as shown. and click OK. 5 In the Filter dialog. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. click . 8 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown.

as in this step.9 On the Options Bar. When creating wires. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. click . Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 257 . Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. or floors. 10 On the Options Bar. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the circuit. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. ceilings. click . click .

The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. neutral. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. and click OK. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 258 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and assign the circuits to panel MDP. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. ground) in the wire run. click Check None. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. click . 12 On the Options Bar. when you create wiring manually. 14 On the Options Bar. click . 16 Using the same method. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. for Hot Conductors. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. 13 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 17 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. you can specify splined wiring. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. and click the switch to select the switches. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. and one ground conductor). Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 11 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. When this occurs. Splined wiring is similar to arc. press Tab. Later. In the next steps. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the large room and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. select Wires. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. enter 2 as the value. you created arc type wiring. lighting fixtures. one neutral conductor.In this step. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. enter 2. but with an additional vertex.

Otherwise. 19 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit.18 For more practice. and restrooms in the 2-Lighting view. conference room. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 259 . These will be connected in a later exercise. assign the circuit to panel H-2. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1-Lighting view. then creating lighting circuits in 2-Lighting. lounge. and assign the circuits to panel H-2. 20 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices.

fixtures. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. assign lighting fixtures to switches. click the Training Files icon. as described below. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. In the left pane of the Open dialog.21 You can save the open file if you wish. 260 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click (Create Switch System). Open the provided dataset. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and specify switch IDs for switches.rvt. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. 2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and panel information. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Switch Systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you will create a room schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. but does not prevent you from doing so.

5 On the Options Bar. The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. The Edit Switch System tab is activated on the Design Bar. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding the switch). and on the Options Bar.4 Click (Select Switch for System). select Multiple. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. click Remove From System. ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. 7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. 6 On the Edit Switch System tab. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. Creating Switch Systems | 261 . click Finish to confirm your selections. After creating the switch system. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. click (Edit Switch System). and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures.

under Instance Properties. and select the switch on the wall outside the ladies’ restroom. and click OK. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. under Instance Properties. . 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. click .8 On the Options Bar. click 14 Click . click Finish System. click Finish System. 9 Click Switch Properties.West. for Switch ID. click Finish. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Edit Switch System tab. 16 Click Switch Properties. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. enter North Stairwell . 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. click Select Switch. 262 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 11 On the Edit Switch System tab. for Switch ID. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 26 fixtures remaining in the system. 20 Click . 17 In the Element Properties dialog.1st Floor. enter Main Entrance . 15 On the Edit Switch System tab. and on the Options Bar.

select Number. scroll down the Available fields list. stairwell. and restrooms in the 1-Lighting view.21 Using the same method. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. 28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 On the Formatting tab. For Name. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. Creating Switch Systems | 263 . Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. and for Heading. Verify that Ascending is selected. enter Room Number. select Rooms. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. scroll down the Available fields list. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. enter Switch Systems. select Number from the Fields list. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Click OK.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Otherwise. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the room containing that system. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. conference room. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. 264 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 For more practice. restrooms. In the left pane of the Open dialog. continue creating switch systems in the 2-Lighting view. and private offices. as described below. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise.2nd Floor for the switch ID. Specify Open Area .The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. Create separate systems for the lounge. Open the provided dataset.

and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. 5 Using the same method. 6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper rooms. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. click Wire. 8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining rooms along the left side of the plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper rooms are visible. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the corner room. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 265 . and delete both home runs. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in on the room at the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Options Bar.

12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle room to specify the endpoint for the wire.10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top room to specify the start point for the wire. 266 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . as shown. 11 Click in the open space near the door for the room to specify the second point for the wire.

and using the same method. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower rooms are visible.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower rooms. your layout should look similar to the following: Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 267 . Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. if necessary. The direction will be corrected. When completed. when the wiring is completed.

Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower room as shown. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. 17 Right click the wire run. and a shared safety ground). and click. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. a shared neutral. as each room was added to the wiring run. 14 Click Modify. select Insert Vertex. In the previous steps. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the number of hot conductors. 268 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower room. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom.Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel.

Vertices let you route wires in your project views. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1-Power and 2-Power views. 19 For additional practice. Completed 1-Power Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 269 . adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. The wire behaves like a spline. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.

2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner room is visible. 270 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Checking Your Design. as described below.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Checking Your Design ” on page 270. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. 1 In the Project Browser. Open the provided dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.

each with a load of 180VA.4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. 7 In the System Browser. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. and expand Unassigned. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 8 In the System Browser. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. Checking Your Design | 271 . 5 Resize the columns in the System Browser until all of the columns are visible without scrolling. The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1-Power. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the room in which the devices are located. release the mouse button. collapse Power. and 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. and click Select. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. 6 Right-click in a column heading in the System Browser. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. and when the preview expands to the width of the window.

14 On the Edit Circuits tab on the Design Bar. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. and on the Options Bar. 15 Click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. and on the Options Bar.10 Open the 1-Lighting and 2-Lighting views and close any windows. 16 Click Finish Circuit. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. click . 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. click to create permanent wiring. 272 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 17 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2-Lighting view have not yet been connected. click Add to Circuit. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. 13 In the 1-Lighting view. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. In the System Browser. press Tab. click to select the circuit. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level.

19 On the Options Bar. click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. for Hot Conductors. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. 25 On the Options Bar. enter 2. Checking Your Design | 273 . arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. click . select Wires. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. press Tab. 18 In the 1-Lighting view. click Check None. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Click . under Instance Parameters. and click OK. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 23 In the Project Browser. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. 20 In the Filter dialog. In the System Browser. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. and click OK. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. 24 In the drawing area. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.

274 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category.26 On the Options Bar. click Check Circuits. click 27 Click . 30 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. and in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 28 Using the same method. to create permanent wiring. select panel L-1. create a power circuit for the 5 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. Check Circuits 29 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.31 Click to view details of the warning. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. click the Training Files icon. Defining Circuit Loads | 275 . Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Circuit Loads. 33 Close the Warning dialog. Open the provided dataset. Finally. In this exercise. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as described below. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rvt. “Defining Circuit Loads” on page 275. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. 32 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.

4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. and Phase C provides 4140 VA.Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. select panel L-2. and double-click 2-Power. In the Project Browser. 2 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. click Rebalance Loads. 276 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. click . while Phase A provides 4500 VA. B. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Examination of the loads on Phase A. and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load on Phase B (4860 VA).

double-click 1-Power. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. Circuits 2. the H-2 panel. Therefore. the load connected to it is less than 15kVA. 7 In the Project Browser.After re-balancing loads. Therefore. you may see different values for the loads. 5 Select panel H-2. and on the Options Bar. a load of 18844 VA. L-1 and MDP. 4. select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. and on the Options Bar. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. and for T1. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel MDP. and 11 feed panel H-2. Defining Circuit Loads | 277 . 6 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. for panel H-2. 9. the values for circuits 1 and 3 are the load presented by the lighting circuits on Level 1 (5664 VA). Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. 13 In the Type Selector. 8 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. The values on the right side shows the load presented by transformer T1 (12780 VA). 11 Click OK. click . enter 40A for the Trip value. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. the distribution is shifted. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. so no further changes are required. and the T1 transformer. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 12 In 1-Power view. Had there been a greater imbalance. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. you can use a 30kVA transformer. and circuits 7. enter 100A for the Trip value. a load of 12780 VA. and 6 feed transformer T1. 10 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click . H-2 is a 100A panel. select the T1 transformer. After the loads are balanced.

the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. Verify/adjust wire sizes 16 Right-click panel L-1. 100. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. click (Circuit Properties). for transformer T2. and select T1 from Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit.14 In the Error dialog. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. 21 Under Electrical-Loads. 23 Click OK. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. 24 In the Project Browser. under Instance Parameters. select panel H-2. 1-#12. on the Options Bar. enter 40A for the Trip value. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. click . 25 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. enter 100A for Rating.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. 1-#8. 19 With panel L-1 selected. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. on the Options Bar. . Notice that it changes to 3-#3. click Disconnect.00A. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 18 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 26 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 22 Scroll down. 20 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#3. double-click 2-Power to make it the active view. 1-#12. click the drop-down list on the Options Bar. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. 278 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. select panel L-1. and click Element Properties.

but must be reconnected to the power circuits. click Disconnect. Size the service entrance conductors 35 In the Project Browser.27 Click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. Defining Circuit Loads | 279 . 38 On the Options Bar. click . 36 With the MDP panel selected. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. 37 Close the Warning. . and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. . in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. under Instance Parameters. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. 28 In the 2-Power view. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. selectM_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. under Electrical Loads. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. select panel L-2. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating.00A. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. select the T2 transformer. 30 In the Error dialog. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. 39 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. 34 Click OK. Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. select T2. 32 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties.

280 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. By following this workflow. including plumbing fixtures. hot and cold water piping. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. and sanitary piping. As you create the plumbing system. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. 281 . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2008. If the tutorial datasets are not present. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. you can choose to save your work. methodology. However. you will understand the process.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk.Plumbing Systems 4 In this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008.

are added under Families in the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. All of the loaded families. click the Training Files icon. click the Training Files icon. 282 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 12 You can save the open file if you wish.rfa M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee. The selected component families are loaded into the project. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: M_Toilet . In this lesson. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.rfa 5 Click Open. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing.rvt. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa 11 Click Open. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures.rfa M_Wall Hung Urinal. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families.Wall Mounted Flush Valve and Wall Hung Urinal. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. planning is critical to a successful design. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems” on page 283.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Loading Plumbing Families. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. click the Training Files icon.

11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Duplicate. 1 In the Project Browser. select Tee For Tee. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. click Rename. select Tee For Tee. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and press Enter. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. PVC Sanitary Vent. select M_Pipe Glued Short Sanitary Tee: Standard For Tap. and click Properties. and click Duplicate.rvt. 3 Right-click PVC 2. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 6 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. under Mechanical. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: Standard For Transition. under Mechanical. select M_Pipe Vent Tee: M_Standard For Tap. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. enter PVC Sanitary for the new name. and click Properties. click the Training Files icon. select None For Cross. select None For Cross. 2 Right-click PVC. “Add Plumbing Fixtures” on page 284. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: M_Standard For Transition. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 4 Right-click PVC Sanitary. 8 Right-click PVC Sanitary Vent. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Configuring Plumbing Pipe Systems. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 283 . select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 10 You can save the open file if you wish. right-click PVC Sanitary. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Rename the new pipe type.

Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. Finally. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. click Plumbing Fixture.Plumbing to make it the active view. 5 On the Options Bar verify that (Place on Work Plane) is selected. 3 sinks. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. ZR (Zoom Region). expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. You then modify the piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Adding Plumbing Fixtures. 3 urinals. click the Training Files icon. you add 2 toilets. 4 Select Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet : Standard in the Type Selector. and 3 sinks.rvt. 284 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and double-click 2 . and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. In this lesson. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. 3 wall-mounted urinals.

and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 400 from the right wall. click to place the toilet. 9 Select Wall Hung Urinal : Standard in the Type Selector. 7 Move the cursor into the stall to the left. click to place the toilet. and when the preview of the urinal is 500 from the left wall. and on the Options Bar. click to place the toilet. click Plumbing Fixture. Place wall-mounted urinals 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 460 from the right wall.6 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. (Place on 10 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. verify that Vertical Face) is selected. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 285 .

as shown and place a third urinal between the other 2 urinals. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. (The placement is not critical. move the cursor up. 18 Working from left to right. Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. (Aligned) is selected.) 12 Click Modify. and click to place the dimension annotation.11 Place a second urinal near the wall of the leftmost toilet stall. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension annotation. You will use the Dimension tool to space them evenly along the wall. click the centerline of each urinal. 17 Using the same method. and click. 16 Move the cursor down. 286 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Dimension. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. verify that References is selected for Pick. and Individual 15 Click the centerline of the left wall.

click Plumbing Fixture.19 Select the rightmost urinal. Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. 26 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. and press Delete. click the value for the blue dimension. 24 In the Work Plane dialog. under Specify a new Work Plane. 25 In the drawing area. select Sink Single Island : Public. and click OK. select Pick a plane. 21 While pressing Ctrl. The urinal is placed 500 from the wall of the toilet stall. Place sinks 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and click the blue dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. and for Plane. and enter 500. 23 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). select Pick. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 287 . and in the Type Selector. (Equal Control) above the 20 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. select the counter top.

(The placement is not critical. click Dimension. 30 On the Design Bar.27 Place the sink 560 from the left wall and 460 from the lower wall. 28 Place a second sink near the right wall. and then delete the dimension annotations. 29 Click Modify. equalize the space between sinks. specify the distance between the rightmost sink and the right wall as 560. 288 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and place a third sink between the other 2 sinks as shown. 31 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals.

and click View Properties. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 289 . click the Training Files icon. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select Level : Level 2. and floor drain. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 33 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and for Plane. In this exercise. and click to place the floor drain. urinals. select M_Round Floor Drain : 125. under Extents.Plumbing to make it the active view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click 2 . “Begin Creating the Sanitary System ” on page 289. scroll down to View Range. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level.rvt. as shown. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 35 Click Modify.Place the floor drain 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 36 You can save the open file if you wish. click Plumbing Fixture. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. and in the Type selector. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Starting the Sanitary Piping System. 34 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. and click Edit. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close.

19 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. Click Window ➤ System Browser. 290 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and click to place the sanitary outlet approximately as shown. and in the Type Selector.4 In the View Range dialog. specify -1500 for Bottom Offset. 16 Right-click in the system browser table. The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. specify Fine for Detail Level. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. NOTE If you do not find the sanitary outlet among any of the families included with Revit MEP. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 21 Click Modify. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. specify -1500 for Level Offset. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click View ➤ Piping. specify -300 13 Click OK. specify -300 11 In the left panel. select Sanitary from the System Type list. 20 Move the cursor over the chase. 6 On the View Control Bar. and under View Depth. click Branch. you can copy the sanitary outlet from this tutorial into your other projects. select Pipe Sanitary Outlet : Standard. and click Main. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. click Mechanical Settings. under Primary Range. 9 In the right panel. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. 5 Click OK twice. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 18 Zoom in on the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room. click Mechanical Equipment.

low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.The sanitary outlet is added to the Unassigned folder in the system browser. (Select Equipment for System). toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. 22 The elevation of the sanitary outlet with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options bar. click area. Right-click the sanitary outlet in the view. click (Create Sanitary System). and click the sanitary outlet in the drawing Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 291 . and floor drain. enter -1200 for Offset. under Constraints. The elevation will be specified as -1200. 24 Zoom in on the men’s room. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. toilets. and click Element Properties. as shown. The urinals.

and on the Options Bar. For more information on Layout Path solutions. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. and on the Design Bar. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). click Layout Path. 27 On the Options Bar. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. as needed. 292 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .00 for Slope. as shown. to view them. 28 Click Solutions. 29 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.The sanitary outlet is added to Sanitary 1 in the System Browser and the sanitary piping system is previewed in the view. 30 Select solution 1 of 6. see Layout Paths. enter 1. click Modify. 31 Select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. and use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment into the middle of the chase above the urinals.

32 Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. and drag it into the chase. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 293 . 33 Click Finish Solution. in line with the branch segment.

and check the slope control. slope. 294 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. as shown. ■ ■ Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. checking for the proper connectivity. Select each pipe segment in the system. The third tab should highlight the entire system. The second tab highlights the fixture. When fittings are reversed. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and orientation of fittings: ■ Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.34 Examine the piping that was automatically placed using the Layout Path tools.

36 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. specify Fine for Detail Level. VG (Visibility/Graphics). and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.35 In the Project Browser. 39 On the View Control Bar. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 295 . and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 38 Click OK. and double-click 3D Plumbing. click Show categories from all disciplines. 37 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Enter the keyboard shortcut.

2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. 1 In the Project Browser. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and double-click 2 . and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 296 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet.40 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon.rvt. adding the sinks in the men’s room. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Connecting Sink Drain Lines. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing to make it the active view. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System” on page 296 to continue creating the sanitary system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

right-click the connector on the open leg. click Pipe Fitting. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. click Options. enter 1000 for Slope Run. If you select the pipe. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. and on the Options Bar.00 for Slope Angle. and click Draw Pipe. and click OK. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. enter 3950. and press Enter. enter 1. click to place the fitting. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 8 Click Modify. 10 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. 7 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. When you press the space bar. 6 In the Layout Options dialog. and when the extension snap displays. press the Space Bar once. 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning.4 Select the tee. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 297 . and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard in the Type Selector.

and press Enter. highlight the wye. 298 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 17 In the Layout Options dialog. click Pipe Fitting. click to place the fitting. and select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard in the Type Selector. 16 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. 15 Select the wye fitting. 14 Using the method learned earlier. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and when the wall centerline snap displays. and on the Options Bar. click the size for the wye leg. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. right click the connector on the open leg. and when the extension snap displays.00 for Slope Angle. click Options. enter 50.11 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down toward the centerline of the wall below the sinks. verify that the slope is specified as 1. and click OK.

20 On the Options Bar. enter 150 for Offset. and click Modify. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. the vertical pipe extends 150 above the level of the floor. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. In this case. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 299 . click to specify the end of the pipe.19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. 21 In the Project Browser. click Apply.

click Pipe.00 for Slope Angle. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. specify 200 for Offset. press Space. click to specify the end of the pipe. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described in the previous exercise. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. 22 In the 3D view. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. 29 Click the connector snap on the right leg. 32 Click Modify. 300 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and on the Options Bar. click Pipe Fitting. 30 In the Layout Options dialog. This is best done by carefully following these steps. and on the Options Bar. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. and click OK. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued Double DWV Wye : Standard. enter 45. 26 Select the double wye fitting. 31 Drag the pipe to the right. and click to place the fitting. click Options. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 27 Zoom in on the double wye.If necessary. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. 28 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 24 On the Plumbing tab. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. The double wye is added to the vertical segment as shown above.

and select the leftmost sink. 41 Move the cursor over the center leg of the fitting. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. and another segment of pipe. and double-click 2 . click the connector snap. click Pipe again. 45 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks.This adds a short segment of pipe from the wye. and click OK. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. an elbow. 37 Drag the pipe to the left. 44 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Layout Options dialog. verify that 45. 34 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. 39 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. click to specify the end of the pipe. and on the Options Bar.00 for Slope Angle is specified. and press Delete. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. click Pipe again. specify 400 for Offset. click Options.Plumbing. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 301 . 46 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. 43 Click Modify. and click Apply. 42 On the Options Bar. 33 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. 40 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 38 Click Modify. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and press Delete. and click Draw Pipe.

select the 3 short segments of pipe connected to the double wye. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. 51 Select Pipe again. drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. and click to specify the end of the pipe. 53 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. and on the Options Bar. specify 40 mm for Size. 302 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Options.00 for Slope Angle. and use the same method to connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. 48 In the Layout Options dialog. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. 54 While pressing Ctrl. specify 0. 52 In the Project Browser. 49 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D Plumbing.47 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. specify 450 for Offset. 50 Click Modify. and click OK.

and on the Options Bar. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). 57 Select solution 3 of 3. click Routing Solutions. 63 On the Options Bar. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. 58 While pressing Ctrl.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 55 While pressing Ctrl. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. click Routing Solutions. 59 Select solution 2 of 2. select the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 3 of 3. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 303 . 56 On the Options Bar. 61 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. 60 Using the same method. and select a proposed solution. Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. You use (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through the up to 6 proposed solutions. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink.

The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. 304 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 71 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location.64 Enter 1. you can make minor adjustments to the system. specify the slope for the piping for the remaining sinks. select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. 65 Using the same method. When the piping was created for the sink drains. M_Pipe PVC Bend : M_Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. right-click Sanitary 1. 69 One at a time. Now that the routing is completed. and click Select. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 70 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser.00 for Slope. When zoomed in close. click Add to System. The arrow points away from the reference end of the slope. and click Finish System. and in the Type Selector. there is a smaller movement. 66 In the System Browser. 72 While pressing Ctrl. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke depends is proportional to the zoom level. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. You can move fixtures by dragging. 68 On the Design Bar. You could have entered a negative value for slope and clicked to specify the end closest to the sink as the reference (with the arrow pointing toward the double wye). 67 On the Options Bar. modifying offset values. such that the arrow is pointing away from the double wye fitting. click (Pick Aligning Element) to toggle the reference end for the slope. and click Finish. expand Sanitary ➤ M_Pipe Sanitary Outlet : M_Standard. click (Edit System). select all 3 sinks.

the entire system should be highlighted.) 75 If you want to save your work. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 76 You can save the open file if you wish.73 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. and select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard in the Type Selector. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 77 Click File menu ➤ Close. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 305 . click File menu ➤ Save As. highlight the leftmost sink. (After the third tab. 74 Using the method learned earlier. skip the next 2 steps. otherwise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and carefully drag it away from the elbow.78 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click on the sanitary outlet to specify a start point for the move as shown. “Refining the Sanitary Stack” on page 306 to continue creating the sanitary system. and select the horizontal pipe. 4 Select the upper elbow. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. adjusting the sanitary stack. 7 Drag the preview approximately 200 along the horizontal line away from the elbow. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 306 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Waste Stack Connection. while maintaining the same angle. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. and press Delete.rvt. 5 Zoom in on the sanitary outlet. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Move). and click to specify the endpoint for the move as shown. select it and on the toolbar.

and on the Options Bar. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 307 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Pipe Fitting. and when the Extension snap displays. and click to place the fitting. 10 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard.8 Select the elbow and vertical pipe segment. specify 150 for D (diameter).

and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. If necessary. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward the sanitary 12 Select the wye. and click Modify.11 Click Modify. The wye is added to the vertical segment. enter 100 to change its size. click the value for the 45 degree leg.Plumbing. 308 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and click piping. 14 On the View tab on the Design Bar. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 13 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. select the wye. and press Enter. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. click Section. double-click 2 .

and click OK. double-click 3D . specify Fine. 20 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 Drag the pipe to the left and down. 21 Click the connector on the 45 degree leg.15 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. click Options. 16 On the View Control Bar. and select the reducing wye fitting. enter 45.Plumbing. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Layout Options dialog. enter -750 for Offset. click Pipe.00 for Slope Angle. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 309 . This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. 19 In the Project Browser. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and press Enter. parallel to the main segment of pipe from the toilets. and when Vertical and Extension displays. 17 Zoom in. for Detail Level.

select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. and press Delete. 26 While pressing Ctrl. and another segment of pipe. and click Finish to create piping for that solution.24 Click Modify. 25 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. and on the Options Bar. click Routing Solutions. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the wye. 27 Select solution 2 of 2. 310 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). an elbow.

29 On the Plumbing tab. 30 Move the cursor over the open leg of the reducing wye. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.28 Select the elbow created by the routing solution tool. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. click Pipe. and click Apply. specify 1200 for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Modify. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 311 . and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. 33 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. and click the connector snap.

expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Urinal Waste Lines. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. click the connector snap. and double-click 2 .Plumbing to make it the active view. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. “Refining the Urinal Lines” on page 312 to continue creating the plumbing system.36 Proceed to the next exercise. (If necessary. then down to connect with the sanitary main. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. running it inside the wall. 312 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.) 3 Press Delete. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. use the Filter tool to select only piping.

9 On the Options Bar. click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 300. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 10 Drag the preview over the urinal drain. Refining the Urinal Lines | 313 . 11 Click Modify. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. click Draw Pipe. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. click once to specify the end of the pipe. 12 In the Project Browser. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe.00 for Slope Angle. and click Options.The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. and click to specify the end of the pipe. press Tab until the Sanitary connection displays on the status bar at the bottom of the window. 7 In the Layout Options dialog.Plumbing to make it the active view. specify 1. and when the snap displays. to a point in line with the center of the leftmost urinal. 6 On the Options Bar. enter 300 for Offset. specify 50 for D (diameter). verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and move the cursor along the center line of the chase. 8 On the Options Bar. drag the preview to the left approximately 200. double-click 3D. starting at the level of the original pipe.

18 In the Layout Options dialog. double-click 3D. drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the urinal. and on the Options Bar. and zoom in on the urinals. verify that the slope is specified as 1. 23 Click to specify the start of the pipe. Connect the remaining urinals 14 In the Project Browser. 19 Drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the middle urinal. 21 Right-click the section of pipe that you just added. and click OK. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation properties of the existing pipe. click Options.13 Click the new pipe segments and check the slope. and click Create Similar.Plumbing. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. 25 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 15 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.00 for Slope Angle. 17 Click to specify the start of the pipe. click Pipe. 314 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 24 Click Modify. 16 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe above the middle urinal and the centerline snap for the urinal. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. double-click 2. 20 Click Modify. 22 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe and the centerline snap for the rightmost urinal.Plumbing to make it the active view. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously.

double-click 2 . specify 80 for D (diameter). Add a cleanout 29 Select the pipe between the 80 elbow and the left urinal. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 100 mm segment) as shown. specify 80 for D (diameter). you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. However.Resize pipes 26 In the Project Browser. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. 27 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. 28 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. So.Plumbing to make it the active view. Refining the Urinal Lines | 315 .

specify 50 for D. select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard. click Pipe Fitting. 32 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. click to place the plug on the tee.30 Select the elbow. 316 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . Redefine fittings 34 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. 35 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and select M_Pipe PVC DVW Bend : Standard. and when the extension snap displays. and on the Options Bar. 33 Select the pipe to the urinal again. select M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee : Standard. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. and in the Type Selector. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. 31 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.Plumbing to make it the active view. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. and in the Type Selector. 36 Select the vertical pipe. double-click 3D.

38 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. Adding Vents to the System | 317 . 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Adding Vents to the System” on page 317 to continue creating the plumbing system.37 Click Modify. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 39 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system.

2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 8 On the Options Bar. click Options. If necessary. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. 10 Click Modify. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described previously. and in the Type Selector. 9 Click Apply.00 for Slope Angle. 318 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Pipe. Create additional vents 11 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and specify 2700 for Offset. 7 In the Layout Options dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. specify 0. specify 50 for D (diameter). 4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Pipe. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE You must move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt.

specify 50 for D (diameter). specify 2700 for Offset. 16 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping. use the Flip control to make the adjustment. 15 Using the same method. place another vent between the two rightmost urinals. and click Apply. Adding Vents to the System | 319 . as shown.12 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click Modify. click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe.

and click the + control above it to change the elbow to a tee. 22 Click the connector at the open leg of the tee to specify a starting point for the pipe. 23 On the Options Bar. right click the connector. 26 Drag the pipe preview a short distance. specify 3000 for Offset. and click Modify.Connect the individual vents 17 Select the vertical vent between the 2 rightmost urinals. 20 Select the elbow at the top of the middle vent pipe. 18 Press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. 320 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. click Draw Pipe. and click Draw Pipe. and click to specify the end point. 21 On the Plumbing tab of the Design Bar. 19 Drag the pipe preview toward the middle vent. 25 Select the leftmost vent. and in the Type Selector. right-click the connector at the open end. An elbow is automatically placed at the joint. click Pipe. and press Space. A short section of pipe is added to the tee. 24 Select the tee and click the plus symbol to its left to change the tee to a cross. 27 Continue dragging the preview to the open connector on the tee at the upper end of the middle vent. click Apply. and click the connector at the open end of the middle vent to specify the endpoint for the pipe.

30 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. specify 50 for D (diameter). and on the Options Bar. and specify 2700 for Offset. Adding Vents to the System | 321 . 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. click Pipe. Add a vent to the sinks 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. click Apply. 34 On the Options Bar.28 Click Modify. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 33 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. specify 50 for D (diameter). and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks.

40 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Draw Pipe. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 38 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 37 Drag the pipe preview.35 Click Modify. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. 36 Select the vent. 322 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . right-click the connector at the open end. “Create the Cold Water System” on page 323 to continue creating the plumbing system. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. 39 You can save the open file if you wish.

5 Right-click Cold Water. and double-click 2 . Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Cold Water Piping. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Rename. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. click Branch. specify M_Pipe Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. which avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. right-click Standard. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click Standard 2. Create the cold water system 14 In the Project Browser. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. 4 Right-click Standard 3. 13 In the left panel. Create the Cold Water System | 323 . click Main. specify M_Pipe Straight Coupling: M_Standard Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. expand Piping ➤ Conversion. specify None For Cross. click Mechanical Settings. enter Cold Water for the new name. specify Tee For Tee. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. 10 In the left pane. click View ➤ Piping. 9 In the table. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. 11 In the left pane. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. specify M_Pipe Elbow : M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. 15 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 2 Repeat the previous step to create another copy of Standard. You now have the cold water piping at 2600 and the hot water piping at 2550. and click Duplicate. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. specify M_Pipe Cross: M_Standard For Transition. and in the right pane. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. in the right pane. specify M_Pipe Tee: M_Standard For Tap. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. in the right pane. enter Hot Water for the new name. click Branch. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. and in the right pane. and press Enter.Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. and press Enter. click the Training Files icon. click Rename.rvt. and click Properties. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 16 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. 12 In the table. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow.Plumbing to make it the active view. click Main.

then select Plumbing Fixtures. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 18 In the Filter dialog. and in the Type Selector. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. click (Connect Into). The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. Create piping for the cold water system 21 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. and click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. click Check None. and click to specify the end the segment. verify that the slope is specified as 0.00 for Slope Angle. The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. click the floor drain. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 24 In the Layout Options dialog. 31 In the Select Connector dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. and click OK.17 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and click to end the run as shown. and on the Options Bar click (Filter). specify 750 for Offset. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). click Options. select the domestic cold water connector. 324 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 29 Click Modify. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. and on the Options Bar. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. 19 While pressing Shift. click Pipe. 30 Select the middle sink in the view. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. select Pipe Types : Cold Water.

40 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe just above the wall. and click to end that segment. (If necessary. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. Create the Cold Water System | 325 . click to specify the end of the pipe. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. 32 On the Plumbing tab. 42 On the Options Bar. click Pipe.A segment of pipe is added connecting the sink to the cold water system. click Pipe. 39 On the Plumbing tab. and click Apply. 34 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. 33 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the 2 rightmost sinks. 41 Drag the preview to the left. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 Click Modify. select the cold water pipe. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. click the snap on the cold water pipe. 37 Zoom in on the area above the toilets. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. specify 600 for Offset. drag the preview to the center of the wall behind the sinks. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. specify 2600 for Offset.) 38 Zoom in on the area between the toilets.

43 Click Modify. 48 On the Plumbing tab. 326 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and then click the vertical cold water pipe. 46 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. double-click 3D. 44 In the Project Browser.Plumbing. select the rightmost toilet. 47 Select the elbow behind the toilet. click Pipe. and click the + control to change it to a tee. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 45 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets.

49 Click the open connector on the tee. and on the Options Bar click . Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. . and click the horizontal cold water pipe Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and on the Options Bar click that you added to the tee. 51 Click Modify. and click to specify the endpoint behind the left toilet as shown. 50 Drag the preview to the left. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. 52 Select the leftmost toilet. 53 Select the rightmost urinal. 54 Use the same method to connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. Create the Cold Water System | 327 . and click the vertical cold water pipe.

58 Select the cold water branch piping from the main.All of the cold water piping is in place. F8. 328 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . specify 50 for D (diameter). 56 While pressing Shift. and then select the horizontal segments as shown. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 55 On the toolbar. The final steps in this exercise will adjust the size of several sections of the piping. feeding the toilets (including the tees. drag the cursor to spin the 3D Plumbing view to allow selecting the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. click (Dynamic Modify View) or enter the keyboard shortcut. 57 On the Options Bar. as shown. but leaving the branch to the urinals as is).

59 On the Options Bar. 61 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 60 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. 63 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. specify 20 for D (diameter). 64 You can save the open file if you wish. Create the Cold Water System | 329 . 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. specify 40 for D (diameter). 62 On the Options Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. to the left of the main cold water pipe. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. and zoom in on the sinks. click the Training Files icon. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Hot Water Piping. click the Training Files icon. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and on the Options Bar. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. and in the Type Selector. select M_Water Heater : 40Gallon. click (Filter). 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. 330 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .rvt. click Plumbing Fixture. click Check None. 10 Double-click M_Water Heater.rfa. create the hot water system. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. select Plumbing Fixtures. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click the title bar for the browser. 5 In the Filter dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and click View ➤ Piping. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the water heater as shown. “Create the Hot Water System” on page 330. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room.Plumbing.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. double-click 2 .

right-click the connector. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. select the water heater in the view. 20 Select the water heater in the view. click Draw Pipe. select the water heater in the view. expand Domestic Hot Water. The Edit System tab is activated on the Design Bar. click Add to System. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. click (Edit System). and on the Options Bar. 17 In the System Browser. 16 On the Edit System tab. and click Finish System. click (Edit System). and click the main cold water pipe. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. 18 On the Options Bar. select Connector 2 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 20.14 In the System Browser. and click Finish System. 19 On the Edit System tab. 15 On the Options Bar. and click Select. and click Select. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. click (Connect Into). Create the Hot Water System | 331 . expand Domestic Cold Water. click Add to System.

26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. specify 800 for Offset. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. and in the Type Selector. 28 On the Plumbing tab. 332 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .23 On the Plumbing tab. 27 Click Modify. 25 On the Options Bar. specify 2550 for Offset. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. click when the hot water connector displays. click Pipe. and in the Type Selector. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 30 On the Options Bar. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click Pipe.

33 Click Modify. Create the Hot Water System | 333 .31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. and click to specify the end of the segment. and on the Options Bar. double-click 3D. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. specify 800 for Offset. 34 Select the middle sink in the view. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. click water pipe below the sinks. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 38 On the Options Bar. and click the hot In this case. click Apply. and click to end that segment. 40 In the Project Browser. click Draw Pipe. (Connect Into). 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. 39 Click Modify. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays.Plumbing. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. 36 Right-click the open connector.

42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. 44 In the Project Browser. 334 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. and click. 46 You can save the open file if you wish. click Pipe.Plumbing. double-click 2 .41 On the Plumbing tab. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close. 43 Click Modify. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems.

At the end of this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After finishing each exercise. methodology. you will understand the process. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. As you create the systems. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. By following the recommended workflow. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2008. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset.Fire Protection Systems 5 In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial datasets are not present. 335 .autodesk. go to http://www. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. you design a wet and dry fire protection system for an office building. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. However.

Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. verify that Mechanical is selected.Mech is created and becomes the active view. click the Training Files icon. enter Fire Protection. and click Rename. During the fire protection design process.Fire Prot for Name. In this lesson. naming it 2 . Next. do the following: ■ ■ Create a level 1 floor plan view based on 1-Mech view. 3 Enter 2 .Fire Prot.Designing Fire Protection Systems Designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. Notice that the 2 Fire Prot view is now relocated under Fire Protection. right-click Copy of 2 . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans.Ceiling Mech view. and create a new 3D view based on the 3D HVAC view. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. right-click the view named 2 . Open the m Starting the Fire Protection Project. do the following: ■ ■ For Discipline.Fire Prot view active. You will also draw the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. and click OK. you modify the view properties. you can then select that discipline or sub-discipline from the list. manually modify the pipes and fittings. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create views and pipe types. TIP Working in different views for each discipline allows you to view only the system components for that discipline and makes system design more efficient. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. This view is based on the 2 Mech view properties. under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Using the method that you just learned. You create views and pipe types.Mech. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. A new view called Copy of 2 . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click in the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. create schedules. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. and finally. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 With the 2 . ■ 336 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .Ceiling Fire Prot. This new sub-discipline creates a Fire Protection view category in the Project Browser. naming it 1 . Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. insert fittings.Mech. Then. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and size and tag the pipes. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. and click View Properties. and create a new ceiling plan view based on the 2 . naming it 3D Fire Prot. For Sub-Discipline. Create new views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click OK. TIP After you enter a discipline or sub-discipline for the first time.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 2 In the Project Browser.

NOTE You can also create. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. select Carbon Steel. including the new material property. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Pipe. click (Properties). Next. click Edit/New. and click Fire Protection. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. you create a pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. you modify the pipe type properties. under Mechanical. right-click the Design Bar. modify. double-click the HVAC listing to collapse it because you will no longer use those views in this lesson. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. right-click a pipe type and use the context menu. for Material. 10 In the Type Selector. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Next. 22 For System Type. and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. 17 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. or verify pipe types from the Project Browser. the command in progress terminates. enter Fire Protection Wet. Next.Remember to specify Fire Protection for sub-discipline so that all views will be listed under Fire Protection in the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. Configure pipe conversion settings 20 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 16 With the Type Properties dialog open. you create 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry systems. and click OK. Create new pipe types 9 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 14 For Name. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Main. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. 18 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 337 . You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Modify. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 23 Under System Type. select Fire Protection Wet. click Mechanical Settings. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In the Project Browser. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. Next. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can also press Esc. TIP When you click Modify. 15 In the Type Properties dialog.

Level 2 is the referenced level for the views that you will be designing in. 27 Click OK. select Branch. 25 For System Type. structural beams.Fire Prot floor plan view to make it active. and sketch a zoom region around Stairwell 30 (located in the lower-right corner of the building). So. 29 Enter ZR. select Fire Protection Wet. you begin the design by drawing the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. NOTE Conversion settings are mechanical settings that are used when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. TIP If a view does not contain room tags. For more information. verify that 2750 is selected. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Draw the supply pipe 28 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that 2750 is specified. 24 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Offset. 26 Under System Type. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes.■ For Offset. duct. Notice that the cursor changes to a magnifying glass indicating that the Zoom tool is active. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. However. refer to Help. 338 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . the pipe main will be offset from level 2. or architecture. The room name and number display in a tooltip and on the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar). This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. you can easily identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component (indicated by 2 diagonal intersecting lines). Next. double-click the 1 .

enter 6400. and click Apply to specify the pipe end point. for Offset. You will need to reactivate it.30 On the View toolbar. 33 On the Options Bar. This line thickness is used for plotting purposes giving the effect of line weights. Thin Lines allows you to view the true thickness of lines relative to the zoom of the view. do the following: ■ ■ For D. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 339 . enter 0. NOTE You can press Tab after specifying the Offset to confirm the value. 34 Place the cursor in the lower-left corner of the stairwell. The new pipe displays. click Pipe. if you reopen Revit MEP. select 150 mm. 35 On the Options Bar. NOTE The Thin Lines display is not saved during your design session. click (Thin Lines) to display the geometry in thin lines. For Offset. 32 In the Type Selector. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 31 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and click in the approximate area to specify the pipe start point.

you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. and press Tab. you created new views and modified view properties. 38 On the View toolbar. Finally. Next. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. you place the wet system sprinklers and create a schedule. In the next exercise. just enter the value. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the rooms. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset provided. you verify the pipe geometry in the 3D view. IMPORTANT After finishing each exercise. However. you drew the supply pipe for fire protection systems. 36 In the Project Browser. you can choose to save your work. and Shading w/ Edges for Model Graphics Style. click (Dynamically Modify View). Notice that the supply pipe extends from the floor in level 1 into level 2. In this exercise. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line and shaded allowing you to better see it. and Spin buttons to verify that the supply pipe geometry is as you expected. 41 In the Save As dialog. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties.TIP When entering a value. 40 If you want to save your work. enter Starting the Fire Protection Project Training for File name. you create a schedule to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. Scroll. For example. 37 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left of the drawing area). you do not need to type measurement symbols. use the Zoom. As you place the sprinklers. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 39 In the Dynamic View dialog. 340 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click File menu ➤ Save. using this information. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. and click Save. you place the sprinklers. Then. navigate to the folder of your choice. select Fine for Detail Level. First. double-click the 3D Fire Prot view. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600 mm.

select Area.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Schedule/Quantities. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required per room. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. 8 In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Formula. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. enter Min. and click Add. For Discipline. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 341 .1. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select it. and click Remove. 6 Select a field.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 12. enter Area/12. Verify that Formula is selected. For Type. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 5 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. do the following: ■ Under Category. Sprinklers. To remove a field. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Available fields. Create a calculated value parameter 7 Click Calculated Value. Open the m Placing Sprinklers. 4 While pressing Ctrl.1 square meters. click the Training Files icon. select Rooms. verify that Number is selected. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. verify that Common is selected.

Verify that Ascending is selected. A new view called Room Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. Click OK twice. Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Fixed. For Then by. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project as if you had used the Element Properties dialog. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per room data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. including spaces. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. Notice that only the data for the level 2 rooms displays. click Field Format. Place a sprinkler 14 In the Project Browser. select 2 decimal places. Organize the data 10 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. sorted according to room number. Although you rounded the data to one decimal place. For Field formatting. 15 Enter ZR. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 rooms. For And. The Min. select Min. You can change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Sprinklers. 342 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . select Number. 11 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine which rooms meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. and double-click 2.NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim. and sketch a zoom region around Office 6 (located in the upper-left corner of the building).Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Level. Verify that equals is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Units. For Rounding. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. 13 In the Format dialog. verify that (none) is selected. Next. Under Level. 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Level 2. 9 Click OK. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. verify that (none) is selected.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ In the Type Selector. For Plane. and specify Level : Level 2. Verify that Chain and Radius are cleared. 21 Draw the line diagonally to the opposite grid intersection. 16 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. and after the intersection snap displays. 17 In the Work Plane dialog. 20 Place the cursor at the ceiling grid intersection as shown. and after the intersection snap displays. This specifies Level 2 as the work plane for the reference lines. you draw 2 reference lines to help you accurately place the sprinklers in the center of the ceiling tiles. ■ Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. 19 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 343 .Next. click to specify the line start point. click to specify the line end point. verify that Level : Level 2 is selected. verify that Lines is selected. 18 Click OK. click Name.

a warning displays indicating that the line is not visible in the ceiling plan view. The line displays. right-click in the drawing area. 25 Using the same method. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Click OK. Notice that the Lines tool remains active.The line is created. 22 With the Lines tool active. and click View Properties. You need to specify an underlay for this view to display the reference lines. for Underlay. under Graphics. 344 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . draw a second diagonal line that intersects the first at the center of the ceiling tile. select Level 2. However.

and after the mid point snap displays. 28 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 29 In the Type Selector. click to place the sprinkler.26 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Line tool. Next. you place a sprinkler. place the cursor over the intersection of the 2 lines. 31 With the view zoomed. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 345 . 27 Zoom in on the lines to verify them. click Sprinkler. 30 On the Options Bar. select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent.

Next. select None. select the sprinkler that you placed. The sprinkler is centered in the ceiling tile. 33 While pressing CTRL. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. The underlay was used only to display the reference lines. and then press Delete. and click OK. under Graphics. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click both reference lines. and click View Properties. you delete the reference lines. you continue placing sprinklers. 37 On the Edit toolbar. Next. for Underlay. 34 Right-click in the drawing area.32 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement in the ceiling tiles. Continue placing sprinklers 36 In the drawing area. Next. NOTE When placing sprinklers. You use this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. you delete the reference lines. 346 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . This removes the Level 2 underlay from the ceiling plan view. click (Copy). The selected sprinkler displays in red.

38 On the Options Bar. click to specify the copy end point. and that Copy is selected. 39 Zoom out so that the entire Office 6 ceiling grid is visible. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination).Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and after the intersection snap displays. and after the intersection snap displays. Notice that the copy selection border follows the cursor. 40 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. click to specify the copy start point. 41 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 347 . You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool.

Copy and array sprinklers 42 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 46 On the Options Bar. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). click to specify the copy start point. and select Multiple. Next. 44 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 6. click (Copy). and after the intersection snap displays. and sketch a zoom region around Office 7 (located immediately below Office 6). verify that Copy is selected. 47 In Office 6. 43 Enter ZR. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. 45 On the Edit toolbar. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 7.TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. 348 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 349 . specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays.48 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 7.

and after the intersection snap displays. 350 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .49 Move the cursor directly down. specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 351 . TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. because all of the sprinklers in Office 7 are equally spaced. select Last. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). you array the other Office 7 sprinklers. NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. 52 On the Edit toolbar. Furthermore. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. 51 While pressing CTRL. click (Array). it is an ideal situation to use an array. creating an array is a 2-step process. For Move To. to specify array end point. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. click Modify. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). 50 On the Design Bar. Next. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 53 On the Options Bar. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 7. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. You first specify an array start point.The sprinklers are placed.

54 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 7 sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays. 352 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the array start point. click to specify the array end point as shown. Notice that an outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. 55 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid.

you place sprinklers in Office 8. 56 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.The Office 7 sprinklers are placed. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 353 . Next.

click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected. 59 In the Filter dialog.57 Starting outside the upper-left corner of the building. click Check None. and click OK. and draw a pick box around Office 6. 58 On the Options Bar. select Sprinklers. Notice that all elements in the 2 . 354 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . drag the cursor to the lower-right.

or by pressing SHIFT and selecting the component. click to specify the copy start point. and after the mid point snap displays. or by selecting individual components. by cross-picking (drag right to left). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 355 . IMPORTANT When selecting components either by drawing a pick box (drag left to right). 62 Using the mouse scroll wheel. you can clear it by filtering. If the selection contains an unwanted component. clear Multiple. 60 On the Edit toolbar. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. click (Copy).The Office 6 sprinklers are selected. you are selecting all components that are visible in the active view (within the view range). 61 On the Options Bar. adjust the view so that you can see both Office 6 and Office 8. 63 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border.

and after the mid point snap displays. click to specify the copy end point.64 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 8. NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. 356 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

69 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. click to specify the copy end point at the ceiling grid intersection.You have now placed the sprinklers for the 3 offices. Open 2. 67 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy). you place sprinklers in the large common space. Open 2. 66 Select the lower-right Office 8 sprinkler. 68 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection snap displays. You copy this sprinkler to Open 2 and use it to create a sprinkler array. 70 Move the cursor to the right into Open 2 as shown. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 65 Zoom to show Office 8 and the part of the adjacent common area. Next. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 357 . Remember to watch for the intersection snap. verify that Multiple is cleared.

For Move To. 74 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. enter 6 for the number of arrays. click (Array). 72 On the Edit toolbar. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. For Number.The Office 8 sprinkler is copied to Open 2. select 2nd. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. You could copy sprinklers. 71 Select the sprinkler that you copied. 358 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Verify that Constrain is cleared. but creating an array is quicker. 73 On the Options Bar. Next. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 2.

and after the intersection snap displays. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 359 . Next. you create multiple arrays based on this array. undo the step and try again. This indicated that the specified end point would be the placement location for the second array. Zoom out to display the array. 76 While pressing CTRL. This is because 2nd was selected for Move To on the Options Bar.75 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. refer to Help. select all Open 2 sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler. For more information about arrays. If you make a mistake placing the array. The array is created. Notice that 4 arrays were created after the end point. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. click to specify the array end point as shown.

77 On the Edit toolbar. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 78 On the Options Bar. 79 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler that is within the array selection. 360 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify end point for the second array. select the object to remove while pressing SHIFT. enter 4 for number of arrays. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. For Move To. For Number. verify that 2nd is selected. 80 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. and after the intersection snap displays. click (Array).If you need to remove an object from a selection. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group And Associate is cleared.

The arrays are created. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. Because this room does not have a ceiling. 84 Open the M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. click Delete Element(s) to delete the 3 sprinklers. you place sprinklers in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. you need to load them in the project. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors.rfa file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder. 81 In the Revit MEP 2008 dialog. To modify a family type. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 361 . Load a new sprinkler family 82 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. first. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. The sprinkler family loads into the project. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). you will use non-hosted sprinklers. However. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 2 is complete Next. click the Training Files icon. 83 In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset).

A warning may display informing you that the sprinkler is not visible in the ceiling plan view. under Constraints. you change the sprinkler offsets. 87 In the Type Selector.Ceiling Fire Prot. You can also use the Mirror tool to place the left sprinkler by drawing a mirror axis at the mid point of the top and bottom walls of the Mechanical/Electrical room. click (Properties). and click OK. 95 In the Project Browser. double-click 2 . 86 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select both sprinklers. click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the right wall. 91 In the Project Browser. and notice that the sprinklers display in the Mechanical/Electrical room. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). 93 On the Options Bar. Next. 94 In the Element Properties dialog. and notice that the temporary dimensions reference the right wall. 362 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . for Offset. Notice that the Mechanical/Electrical room sprinklers do not display. select M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted : 15mm Upright. You can also right-click. 88 In the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room.Fire Prot to make it the active view.Place non-hosted sprinklers 85 With the 2-Ceiling Fire Prot view active. and click Element Properties from the context menu. and double-click 2 . 92 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room. and while pressing CTRL. and click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the left wall. 89 Move the cursor near the left wall. enter 2900 mm. 90 Press the Spacebar to change the listening dimension reference to the left wall. move the cursor toward the right wall. You address this warning after placing the other sprinkler. click Sprinkler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. This specifies the elevation for the selected sprinklers. This occurred because the sprinkler offset elevations are beyond the view range of the active ceiling view. enter ZR. and using the listening dimensions for reference.

you created a room schedule to calculate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each room based on the building specifications and the fire protection code. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. enter Placing Sprinklers Training for File name. Use sprinkler type: M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent for all rooms. 98 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions.Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 96 Using the placement methods that you have learned. navigate to the folder of your choice. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. Remember to click to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Remember to always round decimals up to the next whole number. 97 If you want to save your work. In this exercise. You placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 363 .

you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components (piping is not considered a system). it would be considered empty. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. However. then press F9. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. modify pipe branches. and use the System Browser to confirm your systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. click in the drawing area to make it active. you create a system and piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. As you assign sprinklers to systems. After creating the logical connection. Thus. after you placed the sprinklers. Open the m Connecting Sprinklers. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. In the next exercise. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. During this exercise. If the System Browser does not respond. you also convert and place pipe fittings. So. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and double-click 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. Empty Default system categories do not display in the System Browser. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system.methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. and expand the Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Fire Protection Wet system category located in the Unassigned folder.Fire Prot to make it the active view. Unlike logical connections (systems). 364 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . if all system components are assigned. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. the assigned sprinklers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. You assign a system component (such as mechanical equipment. click System Browser. click the Training Files icon. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. All system components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. a Default system category would not contain any system components. and physically with piping. sprinklers.

click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. 6 On the Options Bar.Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 8 and Office 28. and click OK. click Check None. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected. Connecting the Sprinklers | 365 . Notice that all elements within the 2 . select Sprinklers. 7 In the Filter box.

and will be considered empty. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. After you assign the remaining sprinklers. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected and display in red. 366 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Note that this display indicates that the new system is selected. the system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. the default system category will not contain any sprinklers. Notice that after you click . Notice that the Default Fire Protection Wet system category no longer contains these sprinklers because you have assigned them to a system. 8 On the Options Bar. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Wet 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder.

The main will connect to the supply pipe in the stairwell. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. and select the system. NOTE You do not need to select a system or have system components connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool.Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. you can a system component to access the Layout Path on the Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. Connect the sprinklers with piping 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. 14 On the Options Bar. right-click Fire Protection Wet. expand Piping. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. After placing a system component. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Select to select the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. You can also right-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 listing in the System Browser. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Next. The Layout Path tools are provided on the Design Bar and Options Bar. 13 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. press Tab. This listing represent the system that you just created. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. Remember that systems can be created before or after creating pipe is drawn. and click Select. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. ■ You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. You want the Network layout solution because it connects the sprinklers to a central main. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Click (Next Solution). verify that Solutions is selected. and select solution 2. Connecting the Sprinklers | 367 .

This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. Next. click Modify. verify that 2750. select Branch. 15 On the Options Bar. or architecture. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. you modify the layout path. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that Main is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.0 is specified. You use pipe conversion settings to convert the layout path to physical piping. 368 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click Settings. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 20 Click OK. 22 Zoom in on the vertical main. 17 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. 19 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Modify the layout path 21 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.Next. For Offset. 18 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct. You now modify the vertical main layout that will be the main pipe. 23 Select the vertical layout path segment. A drag control displays. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. structural beams.

drag the main to the left as shown. click Finish Layout. Connecting the Sprinklers | 369 . 25 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.24 Using the drag control.

Either relocate the system components. 370 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 27 Enter VG. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. or manually modify the pipe. Next.The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This is because they constitute a physical rather than a logical connection. You hide these elements to allow you to easily snap to the sprinklers and the pipe. Notice that the cursor snaps to various building elements in the 3D view. Always check pipe connectivity after modification. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you modify the pipe run to consolidate the branch lines and simplify the design. under Fire Protection ➤ 3D Views. You can delete pipes and pipe fittings. Modify the pipe runs 26 In the Project Browser. select a different layout solution. and the system remains. double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. Notice that all of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. or that offset elevations are incorrect. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. and are not part of the system.

28 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. Rooms. and after it highlights. 30 Zoom in and place the cursor over the branch pipe that services the Office 8 sprinkler. Doors. Floors. The selected pipe and sprinkler display in red. Lines. clear Casework. The building elements are hidden. press TAB to highlight the branch pipe and sprinkler. Railings. Connecting the Sprinklers | 371 . 29 Click OK. 31 With the pipe and sprinkler selected. Stairs. do the following: ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. and draw a zoom region around the Office 8 sprinkler. and Windows. Roofs. and click to select them. Ceilings. enter ZR. Under Visibility. Walls.

Remember that although the physical (pipe) connection to the sprinkler has been deleted. select the sprinkler to remove it from the selection. 372 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The Office 8 sprinkler is shown circled).32 While pressing SHIFT. and draw a zoom region around the Open 2 sprinkler (located to the lower-right of the Office 8 sprinkler. 35 Enter ZR. 34 Enter ZF. to zoom out the view to fit the window. the logical (system) connection is still intact. 33 Press Delete to delete the selected elements.

Notice that 2 plus signs display. Connecting the Sprinklers | 373 . Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. You may need to zoom in closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. you convert the elbow fitting at the end of the branch in order to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to it. These controls convert the fitting to the next possible fitting type for the piping context. 37 Click the plus sign on the right. These are fitting conversion controls which allow you to convert the elbow fitting to a tee fitting in either a vertical or horizontal orientation. Convert a fitting 36 Select the elbow fitting at the end of the branch above the sprinkler.Next.

This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting. 374 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 38 Select the tee fitting. A minus sign displays.The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 375 . a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. 40 Select the elbow fitting. and click the left plus sign. 39 Click the minus sign to convert the tee back to the elbow fitting.TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control.

click to specify the pipe start point. 42 Place the cursor over the open end of the tee fitting. to quickly and accurately locate a connector. if a connector snap does not display. pipe fittings. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. . When connecting pipe to some elements. 376 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . use the connector snap. NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to pipe. 43 Using the mouse scroll wheel. Next. click Pipe. zoom out the view so that the tee fitting and the Office 8 sprinkler are visible. or equipments. 44 Begin to draw the pipe diagonally to the upper-left pipe along the same axis as the existing pipe and toward the Office 8 sprinkler. If you pause briefly. Notice that the pipe diameter is larger than the existing pipe.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. Connect the Office 8 sprinkler 41 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. you draw the pipe to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to the branch. and after the end point snap displays. such as pipe fittings and equipment in a 3D view. use the end point snap. . When drawing pipe.

45 Press the Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and offset values to those of the tee fitting. This automatically sets the pipe diameter or width and height. TIP When drawing pipe. enter 300 and press Enter to specify the length of the pipe segment. and the offset parameter to match those of the selected connector. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the pipe type. press the Spacebar after you specify the start point and move the cursor to begin drawing pipe. 47 Continue to draw the pipe. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing pipe. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. You should always verify the pipe type from the Type Selector on the Options Bar. and as the listening dimensions display. 46 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected. Connecting the Sprinklers | 377 .

The pipe segment is created. and select the pipe segment that you just drew. place the cursor over the pipe branch that you modified. 48 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. Notice that all pipe fittings are automatically added. Check connectivity and validate geometry 51 In the 3D view. press Tab 3 times. and after the pipe segment highlights. Next. 49 Select the Office 8 sprinkler. click (Connect Into). 50 On the Options Bar. you check the connectivity of the pipe branch to make certain everything is connected and validate the pipe geometry. 378 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

zoom in on the pipe and fittings. fittings. IMPORTANT Understanding TAB behavior is very important when designing piping systems in Revit MEP. 52 Using the same method. you validate the piping geometry. then you know that a disconnect exists. If the entire network does not highlight. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. and after the objects highlight. and verify that the physical pipe geometry is as expected. indicating that they are physically connected. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. click to select them. Typically a disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make a connection. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. check the connectivity in the 2 -Fire Prot floor plan view. Next. you can click to select them. The lower section of the pipe run displays in red. allowing you to better see the connections. Connecting the Sprinklers | 379 . or you can use the Trim (Extend) tool. After the pipe run and sprinklers highlight. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. To use the TAB behavior for selecting highlighted objects. and equipment.The pipe branch including the sprinklers and the pipe fittings highlight. you can check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. press TAB the required number of times. 53 In the 3D Fire Prot view. When pipes and fittings are connected. The first time you press Tab.

under Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. right-click.Continue pipe branch modification 54 In the Project Browser.Fire Prot to make it the active view. 58 Place the cursor over the selected pipe run. The pipe branch and fittings are deleted. click . and click OK. 56 On the Options Bar. clear Sprinklers. and after it highlights. and click Delete. 380 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . This clears the Office 28 sprinkler from the selection. 55 Zoom the view and draw a pick box (drag left to right) around the upper-right pipe branch (include fittings and sprinkler) that services Office 28. 57 In the Filter dialog. double-click 2 .

61 With the branch selected. clear Sprinklers. 60 Click to select the branch. Both selected branches display in red. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. and after it highlights. 62 While pressing CTRL. including the pipe fittings and lower Office 29 sprinklers. 63 On the Options Bar. click . press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. place the cursor over the lower-left Office 29 sprinkler. and click OK. 64 In the Filter dialog. Connecting the Sprinklers | 381 . and after it highlights.59 Place the cursor over the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. including the pipe fittings and the upper 2 Office 29 sprinklers. select the highlighted pipe branch.

clear Sprinklers.This clears the Office 29 sprinklers from the selection. 68 In the Filter dialog. 67 On the Options Bar. Notice that only the pipes and pipe fittings are selected. Next. you need to delete the pipes connected to the upper-right Open 2 sprinklers. and click OK. 66 Draw a pick box around the 2 upper-right sprinklers in Open 2. 382 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 65 Press Delete to delete the 2 pipe branches including the pipe fittings. Next. 69 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. click . you draw pipe to connect a sprinkler.

and click Draw Pipe. All other pipe properties match those of the selected connector. select the upper-right pipe branch to display the pipe segment connector. 72 In the Type Selector. click to connect to the sprinkler. 74 Draw the pipe down toward the sprinkler. and after the centerline snap displays. click to specify the first pipe segment end point. Connecting the Sprinklers | 383 . 71 Right-click the connector located on the right end of the pipe. 75 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. and draw the pipe to the right toward the upper-right Office 29 sprinkler. and after the connector snap displays over the sprinkler. 73 Zoom the view. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected in the Type Selector.70 In Open 2.

you connect 2 more office sprinklers to the branch. 78 Using the same method. The sprinkler connects into the pipe and all pipe fittings are automatically added. Next. Next. 384 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and select the pipe segment that you just drew. and press TAB twice.The upper-right Office 29 sprinkler is connected. connect the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. 77 On the Options Bar. 76 Select the lower Office 28 sprinkler (located above Office 29). 79 Place the cursor over the horizontal pipe branch. you check connectivity. The Office 28 and Office 29 sprinklers are connected to the branch. click (Connect Into).

81 Check connectivity. This indicates that the branch and office sprinklers are connected. and then click to select the highlighted objects. including sprinklers and pipe fittings. Modify the pipe main 83 Place the cursor over the branch that services the lower Office 29 sprinklers. However. You need to connect these sprinklers. 82 Using the pipe branch modification methods that you learned. The branch including the Open 2 and office sprinklers highlight indicating that they are physically connected. press TAB twice. and after it highlights. Remember to delete the end pipe segment before drawing pipe. you make additional pipe modifications. These sprinklers are not physically connected.The entire pipe branch highlights. 80 Use to connect each of the Open 2 sprinklers to the branch. connect the 2 lower Office 29 sprinklers to the pipe branch located on the left. Next. Connecting the Sprinklers | 385 . notice that the 2 sprinklers in Open 2 do not highlight.

branch. Notice that the highlighting stops at 2 areas along the main pipe. These branches were deleted during branch consolidation. The highlighted objects display in red. 386 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . These disconnects resulted from deleting the 2 tee fittings that connected the branches to the main. making them easier to view. and after the connector snap displays. 86 Drag the lower pipe connector down over the end of the lower pipe segment. and draw a zoom region around both disconnects. 85 Select the upper pipe segment to display the 2 pipe connectors.The connected main. release the mouse button to connect the 2 pipe segments. If you move the cursor. TIP After using TAB to check connectivity. 84 Enter ZR. the connection continues to display for easy reference. This indicates 2 disconnects. and sprinklers display in red. You need to resolve the disconnects. you can click to select all highlighted objects.

89 Select the pipe segment above the disconnect as the extend start point. 88 On the Options Bar. or in resolving disconnects. First.TIP When dragging a pipe connector. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that the Trim/Extend tool is active. You can also enter TR to activate the Trim/Extend tool. notice that cursor changes to a pencil indicating that the Draw tool is active. Connecting the Sprinklers | 387 . As always. use TAB to check connectivity after making any modifications to pipe. Instead of dragging the pipe connector. click (Trim/Extend). NOTE Trim/Extend is a 2-click process. Trim/Extend is especially useful in modifying pipe and duct. 90 Select the pipe segment below the disconnect as the extend end point. you use the Trim tool to resolve the disconnect. then select the object as the trim/extend end point. select the object as the trim/extend start point. 87 Zoom in on the lower disconnect.

92 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 93 Check connectivity. Next. 388 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The main and branches highlight. 91 Click Modify on the Design Bar.The 2 pipe segments connect. you tile 2 views and modify the lower end of the pipe run. indicating that they are connected.

This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session.Fire Prot to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. TIP When you tile 2 views. Notice that all pipe fittings display in their symbolic representation when you are viewing pipes in coarse or medium (single line) Detail Level. enter ZR.Fire Prot view active. Connecting the Sprinklers | 389 . 96 In the Project Browser. 99 Adjust the view in both windows to view the elbow fitting and the left sprinkler as shown. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Note that if this option is unavailable. 98 Enter WT to tile both windows. 97 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan : 2 . including the sprinkler to the right. and draw a zoom region around the elbow fitting at the lower end of the main. 95 With the 2 . You will work in the floor plan view and validate the geometry in the 3D view.Work in 2 views simultaneously 94 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. Next. you tile 2 views to work in them simultaneously. the active view is the only open window. the active view is tiled to the left.

104 Zoom in on the tee. select M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line. 103 In the Type Selector.Fire Prot view. and using the fitting conversion method that you learned earlier. This endcap will provide pipeline cleanout access. First. it is important to remember that the fitting connectors are located in the actual location of the fitting and not in the end of the symbolic representation. 105 Move the cursor over the end of the open end of the tee fitting. Next. especially when symbolic fittings are displayed. This symbolic representation is exaggerated and is larger than the actual fitting size. you place an endcap on the tee. 101 On the View Control Bar located at the lower left of the drawing area. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings.NOTE When you are viewing pipes in single line display (coarse or medium Detail Level). you can change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe or turn off component visibility or filter objects in the Visibility Graphics dialog. Changing the Detail Level to Fine (2 line) will display the fittings in their actual size. select Fine for Detail Level. all pipe fittings display in their symbolic form. 102 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. convert the elbow to a tee with a vertical orientation. you change the view detail level to display pipes in 2 line. 100 In the 2 . and after the mid point snap displays. Remember to zoom the view to better see the fitting conversion controls. You should always zoom in on the fitting when working with a fitting. select the elbow. click Pipe Fitting. click to place the endcap. When snapping to fittings in single line Detail Level. 390 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

validate the endcap geometry. and after it highlights.106 Click Modify on the Design Bar. press TAB once. The endcap and tee fittings highlight indicating that they are connected. 107 Place the cursor over the endcap. 108 In the 3D Fire Prot view. Connecting the Sprinklers | 391 .

However. and pipe fittings display in red. this tee fitting endcap is connected to the tee connector. all fittings and other elements are represented in their symbolic form.109 In the 2 . 111 In the 3D Fire Prot view. 110 Adjust the floor plan and 3D views to view the sprinkler that is located to the right of the tee and endcap. So. use the View Control Bar to change the view detail level to Medium. pipe. The pipes and fittings display in single line. 113 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. their connectors are located in their actual location. You can also select the sprinkler while pressing SHIFT to clear it from the selection. 114 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. Notice that the endcap displays as centered in the tee fitting. 392 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . draw a pick box around the sprinkler and the connecting pipe branch. click . in single line display. The sprinkler.Fire Prot view. As stated earlier in this exercise. 112 On the Options Bar. Next. clear Sprinklers. you modify the sprinkler branch connection.

zoom in and select the left pipe segment. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. release the mouse button to reconnect the pipe branch.115 Select the sprinkler. 116 On the Options Bar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 393 .Fire Prot view. and after the connector snap displays. You need to resolve the disconnect. click . 118 Drag the right pipe segment connector to the right. 117 In the 2 . The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and select the right pipe segment above the sprinkler.

Note that the end of the right pipe segment (and its connector) might be located in the symbolic fitting. notice that the wet pipe segment is located over this room. However. You can also snap to the end point of the tee fitting to connect the pipe. 120 Select the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32. zoom out and locate the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32 (located to the left of Conference Room 31). you remove the pipe above Server Room 32. You need to remove this pipe segment to follow good design practice. You can validate the geometry in the 3D view. Watch for the end point snap as you drag the pipe segment. Next. You will check connectivity later in this exercise.Fire Prot view. Remove a pipe segment 119 In the 2 . You resolved the disconnect. and press Delete. The dry fire protection system will service the server room. 394 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

121 Enter ZR. 123 Zoom out. This closes the left pipe segment end.You will reconnect the Conference Room 31 sprinklers when you later finish this pipe run. Next. Connecting the Sprinklers | 395 . You will close the right end when you finish modifying the lower section of the wet system pipe run. 122 Using the conversion methods that you learned. and check connectivity. convert the tee to an elbow. and draw a zoom region around the sprinkler that you recently modified. you need to convert a sprinkler tee fitting to an elbow in order to close the pipe connection. Remember to zoom the view to locate the fitting conversion control.

You connect these after you validate the pipe geometry. validate the pipe geometry. finish consolidating the branches that service Conference Room 31 (located at the lower-right corner of the building) as shown.Notice that the lower conference room sprinklers are not connected. 396 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Next. Finish modifying the lower section of the pipe run 125 Using the methods that you learned. you connect the lower conference room sprinklers. 124 In the 3D view.

verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. Connect the upper section of the level 2 wet system 127 If the windows are tiled. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers.Remember to resolve disconnects. Next. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Connecting the Sprinklers | 397 . 130 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. system equipment. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. radiators. Select Multiple. and AC units. and maximize the 2 . 129 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. fitting. For System Equipment. or sprinkler that is connected to the current wet system. For Number of Elements. mechanical equipment. and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and number of elements in the system. you can select the pipe or duct. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 126 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. verify that None is specified. and then you create piping to physically connect them. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. select a pipe segment. and pipe or duct is created. boilers. air terminals. 128 In the 2 . such as VAV boxes. 131 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For System Name.Fire Prot view. check connectivity. close the 3D Fire Prot view. verify that 30 is specified. click Add To System.Fire Prot view. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.

398 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. 133 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. 135 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. click Finish. 134 On the Options Bar.This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. click Finish System. 132 Place the cursor outside Office 6 in the upper-left corner of the building. You cannot select them. The selected sprinklers display in red. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. Notice that the Options Bar now reports that there are 66 Number of Elements (sprinklers) in the system.

Also notice that the Unassigned folder is not listed. 140 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. right-click Fire Protection Wet. This is because you assigned all of the sprinklers that you had placed to a system. Notice that the upper section of the system connects to the lower section. Connecting the Sprinklers | 399 . you confirm the system in the System Browser. click System Browser. place the cursor over a newly added sprinkler. 139 Under Systems. 137 With the cursor over the sprinkler. and click Expand All. expand Piping. and click Select. press TAB twice to confirm the entire system. Notice that all of the sprinklers have been assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system.Confirm the level 2 wet system 136 In the 2 _Fire Prot view. 138 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Next. and press TAB once to confirm the upper half of the system.

select any system component to access Layout Path on the Options Bar. verify that Solutions is selected. Click . and select solution 5. 142 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 144 On the Options Bar. Create piping for upper section of the wet system 141 Click Modify on the Design Bar. ■ 400 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .The logical connection displays in red confirming the level 2 wet system. The newly added sprinklers are logically connected. and select a newly added sprinkler. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 143 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Next. you are confirming the logical connection between system elements. you physically connect these sprinklers with piping. NOTE Remember that when you confirm systems. The Layout Path tool activates. not piping which is the physical connection. TIP You do not need to select a system or have system elements (such as sprinklers) logically connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. After placing system components.

147 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. 150 Click OK. select Branch. 146 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Offset.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Settings. 149 Verify that the pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch as for Main. Connecting the Sprinklers | 401 . verify that Main is selected. You now verify the conversion settings that you specified in an earlier exercise. click Finish Layout. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. The selected solution is consistent with the design of the existing pipe run. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a physical pipe run. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. Notice that the main connects to the open end of the cross fitting. verify that 2750. 145 On the Options Bar. as there is a vertical main and horizontal branches. Next. 148 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.0 is specified. 151 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

The fire protection pipe geometry (main and branches) is created. Use M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. you complete the pipe run. If a No auto-route solution found warning displays after you create the pipe run. You will resolve these disconnects when you consolidate the branches. and place an endcap on the cross fitting at the top end of the main. this is because the pipe run (most likely the main) is disconnected. modify the upper pipe run to consolidate the branches and simplify the piping design according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ ■ Use Pipe Type : Fire Protection Wet. Next. This pipe run physically connects the upper wet system sprinklers to the lower wet system sprinklers at the cross fitting. check connectivity. Remember to resolve disconnects. Complete the level 2 wet system pipe run 152 Using the methods that you learned on the lower pipe run. 402 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and validate the geometry.

navigate to the folder of your choice. and double-click 2 . enter Connecting the Sprinklers Training for File name. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and draw a zoom region around Server Room 32. In the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. you used various methods to modify pipe segments to bring the system design more in line with the specifications. The pipes in this system do not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 32. 154 In the Save As dialog. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 33. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create the dry fire protection system. 4 On the Edit toolbar.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. Open the m Creating the Dry System. As with the wet system. 153 If you want to save your work.You have completed the level 2 fire protection wet system. Connectivity was checked. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also converted pipe fittings and placed endcap fittings. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. and pipe geometry was confirmed in the 3D view. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 403 . Finally. and click Save. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. After creating the system. Place sprinklers 2 Enter ZR. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. click (Copy). click File menu ➤ Save. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. In this exercise. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared.5 On the Options Bar. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. 8 Move the cursor diagonally to the upper-left. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. 404 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. Verify that Copy is selected. 7 Move the cursor to the right along the same horizontal ceiling grid and into the Server Room 32. and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy start point. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler.

The System Browser opens.9 Click Modify. select both sprinklers. Next. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Create the dry system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. you change the sprinkler type. you create the dry system to logically connect the 2 sprinklers. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 405 . You can also turn off snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. while pressing CTRL. select both Server Room 32 sprinklers. Expand Unassigned to view the 2 dry sprinklers that you placed. Next. click System Browser. 13 Under Systems. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. 14 In the drawing area. select M_Sprinkler-Dry_Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Dry Pendent. 10 While pressing CTRL. 11 In the Type Selector.

Next. right-click. Next. 22 In the Type Selector.0 is specified. 21 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and the Default Fire Protection Dry system category is considered empty. verify that 2750. you create the pipe run to physically connect the sprinklers. (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign Notice that after you click . Each selected sprinkler displays in red. click Options. 17 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. 25 In the Layout Options dialog. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. Create the dry system pipe run 19 In the Project Browser. click the sprinklers to it. This indicates that you have assigned all of the dry sprinklers to a system. 20 Zoom in on Server Room 32. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. enter 0. For Offset. and click Select. You have confirmed and validated the system. In the System Browser. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. and click OK. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. click Pipe. and so on. 26 Place the cursor outside Office 33 and over the vertical main pipe that services the wet system. sprinkler size. Confirm and validate the system 16 In the System Browser.15. 23 On the Options Bar. double-click 2 . you can view system information including flow. The sprinklers are logically connected.Fire Prot to make it the active view. 24 On the Options Bar. and click Select The selected system displays in red. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. verify that 15mm is selected. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry.15 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection snap displays. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Dry system category no longer displays. for Slope Angle. and for each sprinkler. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Dry 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Dry in the Piping folder. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. the dry system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). 18 Expand Fire Protection Dry 1. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 406 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

Notice that the pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper Server Room 32 sprinkler. 30 On the Options Bar. You can confirm this in the 3D Fire Prot view or by checking connectivity.27 Draw the pipe run to the right. and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. click . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 407 . Next. and connect to the lower sprinkler as shown. 29 Select the unconnected Server Room 32 sprinkler. 28 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. Watch for the centerline and connector snaps. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe.

34 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. You can click the slope control to change the slope direction. click (Create Similar). you connect the fire protection system pipe run to the supply pipe. 33 Zoom in on Server Room 32. you check connectivity and validate the pipe geometry. To follow good design practice. and double-click 3D Fire Prot. 38 On the Options Bar. 35 Zoom in on the pipe to validate that the pipe geometry is as expected. indicating that they are connected. click Options. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 32 In the Project Browser. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight.The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. 36 Select the vertical main pipe. expand 3D views. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. 31 Zoom the view. 408 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Notice that the slope displays next to the slope control. under Fire Protection. and press TAB 3 times. 37 On the Edit toolbar. Next. Next. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes.

39 In the Layout Options dialog. do the following: ■ Under Category. checked pipe connectivity. 41 Using the methods that you learned when consolidating branches. for Slope Angle. 42 Check connectivity. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. click Schedule/Quantities. and in the 3D view validate the pipe geometry. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. and click Save. click the Training Files icon. select Family and Type. Click OK. 40 Zoom in on the supply pipe located in Stairwell 30. First. 43 In the Save As dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 409 . draw the pipe to the left and connect it to the main as shown. However. Then. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 4 Under Available fields. and click Add to add the field to the list. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter 0. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create pipe. or by right-clicking a connector. select Sprinklers. Open the m Modifying Pipe Diameters.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. This adds the Count field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. always verify that the pipe type is correct in the Type Selector. In this exercise. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. under Available fields. Additionally. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. if you use the Create Similar tool. and click Add. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. you placed dry system sprinklers. This clears the slope. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. After the system was completed. you connected the fire protection pipe run to the supply pipe that provides water to the fire protection system. and click OK. navigate to the folder of your choice. You have completed the dry fire protection system. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 32. In this case. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. . Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. enter Creating the Dry System Training for File name. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. select Count. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that you did not need to verify the pipe type because Create Similar matches the connector parameters and the type of the selected object. IMPORTANT When drawing pipe either by using the Pipe draw tool on the Design Bar. the pipe type and other properties match the vertical main that you selected.

and click Remove. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Then by. There is a grand total of 68 sprinklers on level 2. Select Grand totals. You can refer to this sprinkler total as you modify the pipe diameters in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. 5 Select a field. 8 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Next. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ Count Family and Type Next.If you need to remove a field from the list. 10 Enter WT to tile both windows.Fire Prot to make the view active. and that it is sorted according to family and type. and clear Itemize every instance. Notice that only the data for the level 2 sprinklers displays. Verify that Ascending is selected. 410 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. You may need to drag the column dividers to modify the column width. you tile the floor plan and 3D views. Next. TIP When you tile 2 views. you modify the pipe diameters. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make the view active. A new view called Sprinkler Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. Organize the data 6 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Note that this option is not available if the active view is the only open window. and double-click 2. 11 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. you specify how the data will be organized in the schedule. 9 In the Project Browser. select Family and Type. select it. verify that (none) is selected. the active view is tiled to the left. Click OK twice. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. Tile the views 7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans.

or width. 13 On the Options Bar. or height. and while pressing SHIFT. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. width. width. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. and click OK. select the supply pipe in the stairwell to remove it from the selection. Changing the diameter. 14 In the Filter dialog.Fire Prot view. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 15 Click in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. click . draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection pipe run. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. height. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 411 . Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 12 In the 2. click Check None.

For D: (diameter). 17 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar. and the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for these pipes. 412 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and press TAB twice. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 25mm diameter except for the supply pipe.16 On the Options Bar. You changed the diameter for the pipe run because the majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 18 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. you modify the diameter the main. verifying that it is connected. Modify the diameter of the main 19 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. Next. select 25mm.

and the supply pipe. The selected main pipe displays in red. 20 With the main selected. the pipe fittings. while pressing CTRL. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. If branch segments are selected. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 413 . draw a pick box around the horizontal main.NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments.

414 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . select the supply pipe. verify that the diameter is 150mm. 25 Validate the pipe run geometry. The diameter of the fire protection main changes. 24 In the 3D view.You want to maintain the original supply pipe diameter. 23 On the Options Bar. for D:. select 100mm. 21 Click in a blank space in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the 3D view. so you need to exclude the supply pipe. while pressing SHIFT. select the supply pipe to remove it from the selection. especially around the pipe fittings.

Fire Prot view to make it active. 27 Enter ZR. 28 Select the first pipe segment that services Conference Room 31 and directly connects to the main. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 415 . and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 rooms in the building. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers.Modify the diameter of branch pipes 26 Click in the 2 . You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the code requirements.

click Tag ➤ By Category.This pipe segment services 6 sprinklers (4 in the office and conference room. select 40mm. select 40mm to comply with the design criteria. Later in this exercise. for Pipes. This segment services 5 sprinklers. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe segments and fittings. 30 Select the next pipe segment to the right. under Category. 29 On the Options Bar. zoom in on the branch that you modified. 36 On the Options Bar.Fire Prot view. 35 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Clear Leader. click to place the tag. Tag the pipes 34 In the 2 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. you continue to modify the pipe branch. verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded. you tag some of the pipes enabling you to identify their diameters. you will complete the branch diameter modification. The pipe segments including the elbow and 2 tee fittings display in red. and 2 in the open space). select 50mm. Next. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. 416 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . for D:. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Place the cursor over the pipe segment that connects the conference room sprinklers to the Open 2 sprinkler. 39 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment that connects the conference room branch to the main. The 25mm pipe diameter complies with the design criteria. for D:. The pipe diameter is modified. and click to select them. and after the segment highlights. The specifications requires a diameter of 50mm for this pipe segment. The rest of this pipe branch services 2 sprinklers. for D:. Next. 33 On the Options Bar. Click Tags. You can verify this selection in the 3D view. 37 In the Tag dialog. 38 Click OK.

Next. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 40 On the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 417 . Next. and finish placing the pipe tags. you place a tag and include a leader line. 43 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. 42 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). 41 Place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell.NOTE Tags are view specific. select Leader. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters.

you confirmed the logical systems using the System Browser. 418 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. and click Save. each system was completely different. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system consisting of sprinklers and piping. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. enter Modifying Pipe Diameter Training for File name. For additional practice. finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. This completes the Designing Fire Protection Systems lesson. The completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire Protection System. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In the lesson. navigate to the folder of your choice. Although the creation and modification methods remained the same. Sprinklers Serviced 1. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 45 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. Finally. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. and finish tagging the pipes.Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 44 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. you tagged the pipes. In this tutorial. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. 2 3 4. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using a floor plan and the 3D view. Finally.

We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.Documenting Your Projects 2 In this section of the tutorials. 419 . balconies. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. lofty ceilings. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. exterior fire stairs. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2008. and a roof garden. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.

NOTE For training purposes. 420 | Chapter 6 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.

and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 421 . section. including plan. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. elevation.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 6 In this tutorial. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.

you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model.Creating Views In this lesson. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn how to create new views from existing views. how to create section and elevation views. 422 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.

and click OK. select Level 2. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Training Files. 9 In the Project Browser. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. Duplicating Plan Views | 423 . and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 2 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename.

under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click 1: 1000. 424 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 On the View Control Bar. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. Next. click the current scale. enter Vicinity Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Floor Plans. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 425 . Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.16 Right-click. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

under Floor Plans. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select1:100. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. double-click Level 1.rvt. 426 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. click Elevation.

click Modify. click Modify. under Elevations. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. double-click South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 11 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 427 . Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog.

under Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Building Section. select 1:100. click Section. 14 In the Type Selector. and double-click Level 1. 428 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. for Scale.

and click to place it.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. Click the midpoint of the section line. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 429 . click Split Segment.

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and double-click Section 1. 430 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Modify. 24 Select gridline F. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. expand Sections (Building Section). 23 On the View Control Bar.21 On the Design Bar.

you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. Creating Callout Views | 431 . you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. To create each view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.rvt.

select 1:50. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. and specify a point to complete the callout. and select the callout boundary. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan. 432 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. for Scale.

Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.■ Select the middle grip. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Callout Views | 433 . and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. double-click Section 1. select 1:50. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 434 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sections (Building Sections).Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 13 In the Type Selector. for Scale. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 14 On the Options Bar. click Callout. select Detail View: Detail.

Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 435 . under Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. the elevation markers. You change the appearance of the section mark head.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Existing stair callout head and boundary 436 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.

enter Section Head – Custom. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click the Annotation Objects tab. select the current project.Custom. and click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. scroll to Section Line. and click OK twice. 10 On the floor plan. click Load into Project. click Edit/New. for Section Head.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Section Tail – Filled. and click OK. select Custom-Section Head. select the section line. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 437 . and click OK. and click Open. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. double-click Level 1. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 4 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Name dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. select Section Head . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 For Section Tag. . Section Tail . and can be applied to the section line.rfa. click Duplicate. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 15 Under Category. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files.rvt. clear any others. under Floor Plans. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Filled.

27 Click OK twice. 438 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .5mm Square. clear all others. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. On the floor plan. 22 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Click OK. select 12. 19 Click OK. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. and select 2. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. For Line Weight. select the current project. for Elevation Tag. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. For Dimensions ➤ Width. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. click Duplicate. 17 Under Category. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select 3. select Custom-Callout Head.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Square. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing.rfa.5mm Square. . 30 On the Design Bar. notice the square elevation markers that display. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll to Section Marks. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. click Load into Project. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. On the floor plan. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar.5 mm. and click Open. enter 12. enter 12. click Training Files. and select 3.

expand Callout Boundary. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.33 In the Type Properties dialog. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. enter . 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. Click OK. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 39 Click OK twice. for Callout Tag. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 46 Under Category. click the Annotation Objects tab. and select 4. 40 Press ESC. and on the Options Bar. select . click Duplicate. . click Edit/New. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 45 For Line Pattern. enter 6 mm. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 34 In the Name dialog. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. For Corner Radius. select the callout. 43 Under Category. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. select Dash. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 49 Click OK. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 439 . and select 7. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 36 In the drawing.

and visual overrides. masking regions. and double-click East. Creating a View Template In this exercise. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You learn to create view templates. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. The crop region displays as red.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 440 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. filters. under Elevations. view regions. click Training Files. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings.rvt. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and apply it to multiple elevation views.

right-click East. and click Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 441 . under Visibility. 8 Click OK. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. click Zoom to Fit. under Elevations. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 5 On the View Toolbar. 4 On the Design Bar. clear Entourage. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 Under Visibility. 6 On the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.

15 On the View Control bar. right-click East. and click Apply View Template. Callouts. elevation markers. grids. and click Create View Template From View. levels. 19 In the Project Browser. click OK. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. double-click North. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 442 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. under Elevations. 17 In the New View Template dialog. 20 In the Project Browser. select Black and White Presentation Elevation.14 Click OK. 16 In the Project Browser. and section lines are now hidden in the view. under Elevations. 18 In the View Templates dialog. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. right-click North. and click OK. click Apply.

4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. double-click Penthouse. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. under Floor Plans. select Penthouse. select Level Below (Level 4). 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Range.rvt.rvt. View Range and Plan Regions | 443 . 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. for Level. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. for Bottom. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. right-click. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Under View Depth. select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents. and click Properties. click Edit. Click OK twice.

8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for View Range. 6 In the Project Browser. for Level. select Roof Plan. for Bottom. 444 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Roof Plan. select Level 4. under Floor Plans. select Level 4.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. click Edit. and click Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. Click OK twice. under Extents.

Move you cursor diagonally. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Plan Region. click Modify. click Edit. select Unlimited. 10 On the Design Bar. Under View Depth. click Finish Sketch. select Unlimited. for Bottom. View Range and Plan Regions | 445 . under Extents.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. for View Range. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 11 On the Options Bar. for Level. In the left corner of the building. click Region Property. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region.

and click OK. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. under Filters. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. under Views (all). the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. in this case. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Edit/New. select Fire Rating. click the Filters tab. 7 In the Filters dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. the fire rating of the walls. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 446 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. under Categories. select Walls. enter Rated Walls. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click (New). 5 In the Filters dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. After you apply the filter.

click OK. select the red color. under Projection/Surface.■ ■ Select contains. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Solid Fill. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Basic colors. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 11 Select Rated Walls. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Masking Portions of a View | 447 . Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. for Rated Walls. for Color. click No Override. click Override under Patterns. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 16 Click OK. 9 Click OK. To accomplish this. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. for Pattern. 12 On the Filter tab. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. and click OK. 14 In the Color dialog. Enter Hr. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Add. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 17 Using the same method. and click OK. click Remove. 10 On the Filter tab.

rvt. 4 On the View Control Bar. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 5 On the View menu. right-click. as shown. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 448 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Show Crop Region.

Masking Portions of a View | 449 . click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 11 In the Type Selector.7 On the View menu. select Invisible lines. 9 On the View Control Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click (Rectangle). click Masking Region. 8 Select the crop region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. under Floor Plans. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 1 In the Project Browser. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 450 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. click Finish Sketch.14 On the Design Bar.Level 1. right-click Unit 18 Plan .

3 In the Rename View dialog. click black. for Color. and click OK. click in the Patterns field. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Visibility. right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 451 . and click OK. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. select Walls. for Pattern. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. right-click. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 Click OK twice. select Solid fill. and click Override. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. under Pattern Overrides. and click 1: 50. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click the current scale. click No Override. 4 On the View Control Bar. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 7 Under Cut. and click Rename.

452 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Visibility. and click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Floors. click Modify.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. clear Grids. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 16 Under Visibility.

18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 453 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. for Pattern. and click OK. under Lines. select Dash. click By Category Override. select a bright green color. By using the previous method to make the selection. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 29 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 25 Click OK twice.20 Right-click. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. click No Override. for Color. 23 In the Color dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 28 For Color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select the sofa. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 454 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Projection Lines. click Override. and click OK twice. right-click. click a purple color.

right-click. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. The hidden crop region is also revealed. 33 On the View Control Bar. Working with Visual Overrides | 455 . 32 Select one of the lamps.30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click . click . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. right-click. and click View. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.rvt. select A0 metric.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Sheet. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. 456 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. and click OK.Creating Sheets. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

For Sheet Name. 5 When the title block highlights.Unnamed. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. expand Sheets (all). and select the title block. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Site Plan. click Modify. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. enter A101. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 457 .A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. For Sheet Number. on the Options Bar. 3 In the Project Browser.

11 In the Edit Text dialog. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. MA 12345 12 Click OK.■ Click OK. 2007. click Edit. 14 Click OK. enter 15 May. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter Freighthouse Flats. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. click Modify. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. The new project information displays in the titleblock. for Project Address. enter For Approval. For Project Number. For Client Name. enter 2007-1. 458 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. Smith. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Name. enter J. For Project Status. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 7 On the Design Bar.

Elevations A106 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Layout Plan A104 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. and click OK. select Level 1. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Rename. 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. and click Save. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. right-click. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click A102 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you add views to these sheets.Elevations A107 . enter Floor Plan. under Floor Plans. and click to place the view.Sections A108 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Modify. Adding Views to Sheets | 459 . 17 In the Project Browser.Floor Plan. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. for Name.rvt. select the new sheet name. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Stairs In the following exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. select A0 metric. and drag it to the sheet.Elevations A105 . under Sheets (all).

drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. click Modify. 460 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .The red border around the view no longer displays. and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A104 .Elevations. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. 16 Select title bar. click Modify. select 1:5. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. Adding Views to Sheets | 461 .Sections. . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. under Sheets (all). for View Scale. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. double-click A107 . and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.

18 Under Floor Plans. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.Stairs. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). 21 Zoom to the stair callout. double-click A108 . move the cursor over it. and click to place it. double-click Level 1. zoom in to the grip. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and press TAB until it highlights. under Floor Plans. 462 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Sections. and then make changes and deactivate the view. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. double-click A107 .22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. you must first activate the view on the sheet.rvt. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. under Sheets (all). Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 463 . In order to do this. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and click Deactivate View. 464 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Activate View. and press ENTER.2 Select the building section view. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 5 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. enter 16700 mm. 6 Right-click. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. right-click. double-click North. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.

rvt. Click OK. and click OK. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. The camera view displays. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. select A0 metric. and click Properties. click Camera. 7 Place the camera as shown. For Sheet Name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 465 . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. You modify the view to hide the view title. double-click Level 1. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. After you create the sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter T. enter Title Sheet. right-click. select the new sheet name. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

14 Under 3D Views.8 On the Options Bar. select Far Clip Active. enter100000 mm. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Under Camera. for Eye Elevation. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 1500 mm. double-click T . For Far Clip Offset. Under Extents. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. under Sheets (all). 466 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet.Title Sheet. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK. enter 18000 mm For Target Elevation.

19 Select the view on the sheet. and then click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 25 On the Design Bar. Under Model Crop Size. enter 635 mm. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. Click Apply. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Modify. 24 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. for Show title. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 467 . and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. 22 In the Name dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). . under Graphics.15 With the view selected. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. select No. click Modify. click Size. for Height. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change.

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 468 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

such as doors and windows. such as room and window schedules. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.Tagging and Scheduling 7 In this tutorial. You also learn to create different types of schedules. 469 . in your Revit MEP 2008 projects.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. right-click in the Design Bar. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. Because of the open style floor plan.Level 1. click Training Files. and click Room and Area.Tagging Objects In this lesson. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Room Separation. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP.rvt. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. 470 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 471 .4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

indicating that it can be edited. and the rectangle contains the room tag. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 15 On the Design Bar. The room tag number displays in blue. and select the room tag. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Load.7 On the Design Bar. click Room. 472 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 11 In the Tags dialog.rfa. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and click to place the room and tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Tags dialog. click OK.

click Room. click it. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 473 . 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. enter Entry. 17 Click the room text label. and press ENTER. enter U18-1. click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER. Click to place the new room and tag. 18 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.16 Zoom in on the tag number.

21 Click the room text label. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. enter Kitchen. 474 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Dining. Sequential letters are also supported. and press ENTER.

click Room Tag. Tagging Doors and Windows | 475 .24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK.rvt. but they need to be tagged. The rooms are already placed. 26 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Model Categories tab.Level 2. in the Project Browser. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. expand Floor Plans. clear Room Separation. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Level 1. you learn how to place door and window tags. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. and moving clockwise. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. expand Lines. click Modify. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser.rvt.

6 Click the door tag for the entry door. click Tag ➤ By Category. click (Properties). 8 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Leader. enter U18-1. and press ENTER. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. for Mark. enter U18-2. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. under Identify Data. click Modify. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 476 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

under Category. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. and click OK. Tagging Doors and Windows | 477 . 13 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. select Door Tags.Level 2.

22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 478 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. select Window. 21 Click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Load. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.

6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Zoom flyout. click Tag ➤ By Category. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tag All Not Tagged. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 26 On the View toolbar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select a dining room chair. you learn how to tag furniture objects.rvt. click Yes to load a tag. 27 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. and click OK. 5 At the confirmation prompt. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view.rfa. 28 Select Window Tags.Level 1. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. Tagging Other Objects | 479 . and modify the tag placement and display. select Leader. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise.

14 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. and on the Options Bar. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 12 Click the elbow control. and drag it up to form an angled leader.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 13 Optionally. clear Leader. and drag it above the chair tag. 480 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 Select the tag for the table. 9 Click Modify. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs.

under Floor Plans. click Modify. 20 On the Options Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan .16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. click (Filter Selection). All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tagging Other Objects | 481 . 18 On the Design Bar. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. and on the Design Bar. select M_Furniture tag : Standard.Level 2.

and click Modify. 22 In the Type Selector. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. and click OK. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. select Furniture Tag: Boxed.21 In the Filter dialog. 482 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Check None. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. select Furniture Tags.

that is. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Finally. a schedule that lists every window in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. Next. click Training Files.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Window Schedule | 483 . in which windows are listed by window type. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.rvt.

under Category. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Comments and click Add. right-click in the Design Bar. enter Building Window Schedule. 6 Under Available fields. and click OK. 4 For Name.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. click Schedule/Quantities. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and double-click Level 1. and click View. click the Fields tab. 9 Click OK. 484 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Using the same method. select Windows. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

However. right-click the schedule. and on the Options Bar. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. and click OK twice. click Close. and click View Properties. 13 In the Project Browser. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. you are prompted to open one that does. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. for Sorting/Grouping. NOTE By clicking Show. Creating a Window Schedule | 485 . in large building models with many views. select Type Mark. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. click Show. this can be a time-consuming process. under Other. If no open view shows the selected element. expand Schedules/Quantities. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. for Sort by. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window.

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. double-click Level 2. 22 Click OK twice. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. The window type schedule is displayed. and press ENTER. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. sorted by type mark. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. under Floor Plans. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule.The window schedule is displayed. and click View Properties. clear Itemize every instance. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. 486 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. under Other. for Sorting/Grouping. click Edit. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. For Discipline. Under Parameter Data. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 487 . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Construction. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. unlike shared parameters. for Name.rvt. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. 5 Click OK. click Add to create the new parameter.rvt. you cannot use them to tag objects. jamb. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. select Type. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. and sill conditions for a window can be found. For Group parameter under. In this case. expand Schedules/Quantities. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. enter Head Detail. and double-click Building Window Schedule. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

click in the Head Detail header. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 Click OK twice. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. under Other. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. and while pressing the left mouse button. under Available fields. click Edit. select Head Detail. click Group. enter Window Details. TIP To select all 3 headers. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. Jamb Detail. right-click Building Window Schedule. select the following fields. and Sill Detail. 488 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . for Fields. so that they are listed before Comments. and click Properties.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 489 . and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter. select Doors. Enter U18 in the third field. Select contains in the second field. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. Verify Schedule building components is selected. for Jamb Detail. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Door Schedule. Under Name. 6 Under Available fields.Level 1. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click the Fields tab. for Head Detail. enter 2/A107. enter Unit 18 . View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. enter 3/A107. For example. under Type Mark A. enter 1/A107. 4 Click OK. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. and for Sill Detail. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. select the following fields. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

but is not included as a column in the schedule. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 15 On the Design Bar.Unit 18. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. and click OK. click Modify. click Unit 18 . and double-click A102 . 10 Under Fields. expand Sheets (all). Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Field formatting. select Hidden Field. 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Mark. and drag it to the sheet. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 490 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). 13 In the Project Browser.Door Schedule. select Family and Type. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.

double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Available fields. 8 Click OK. and click View. under Category. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 5 Using the same method. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. and click Add. under Floor Plans. click Modify. select Number.rvt. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. Creating a Room Schedule | 491 . right-click in the Design Bar. 7 To the right of Header text. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. 19 On the Design Bar. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. and click OK. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Rooms. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan.

A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 102. enter Storage. next to Rows. add 5 more rooms. for Name. For 105. for room 101. 101-106. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. select Corridor. enter Building Entry. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. For 103. For 104. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. 10 Edit the number to be 101.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. select Storage. enter Corridor. and press ENTER. 11 Using the same method. The room Number is U17-9. and press ENTER. click New. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 492 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. For Room Separation. under Projection/Surface. and press ENTER. select 9. enter Stair. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Under Custom colors. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Room Separation. In the Line Graphics dialog.rvt. click the bright green swatch. click Override. click the Color field. you add room separation lines.■ For 106. place rooms from a program list. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. double-click Level 1. and click OK. click the Lines field. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. expand Lines. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 493 . In the Lines field. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. For Weight. under Floor Plans. and modify room names. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

click Modify. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. 8 On the Design Bar. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 494 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . First. click Room.

for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. for Room. select 102 Storage. 12 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. 13 For Offset. enter 2400 mm. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 495 . 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right).

Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 496 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. click Modify. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. under Schedules/Quantities. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Floor Plans. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. 16 On the Design Bar. and zoom in to the Corridor. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. double-click Room Schedule.

and click Add. enter As Selected. 26 Select Schedule keys. and for all 3 finishes. click (Properties). under Constraints. Floor Finish. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 23 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar.19 While pressing CTRL. select Base Finish. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. click New to add a new row. while pressing CTRL. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 497 . and click OK. select Rooms. under Available fields. 29 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). double-click Room Schedule. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and click OK. 30 For Key Name. under Category. and Wall Finish. enter Units. click Schedule/Quantities. clear Room Bounding. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule.

40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. click Zoom To Fit. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. click (Filter Selection). double-click Room Schedule. and click Properties. for Room Style. for Available fields. under Floor Plans. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. click Edit. and click Add. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. click Check None. 32 In the Project Browser. select Units. right-click Room Schedule. 35 Click OK twice. Zoom flyout. 39 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. 41 On the Options Bar.31 Using the same method. select Rooms. click Room Style. for Fields. 498 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 36 In the Project Browser. 37 Under U17-8. under Schedules/Quantities. under Other.

under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. double-click Room Schedule. click (Duplicate). and click Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click OK. and click OK. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. For rooms 102 and 105. select Service. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Room Style. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click Level 1. 103. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 499 . and click OK. click (Properties). The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. click the Color Scheme field. enter Room Type. under Views (all). All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. and double-click Level 1. select Room Type. and 106. 5 For Title. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 104. expand Floor Plans. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. enter Room Type. 9 In the Project Browser. for Room Style. select Public. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select Units. at the warning prompt. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. 45 In the Project Browser. and apply it to the Level 1 view.rvt. 6 For Color. click OK. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog.43 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

click Modify. 500 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . clear Visible. click Edit Color Scheme. and click OK twice. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. expand Lines. click Edit. 22 In the Color dialog. click the value in the Color column. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). under Custom color. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the color legend. click Color Scheme Legend. select blue. select Foreground. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. for Display Color Fill in. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. and clear Room Separation. 21 In the second row of the table (Public).

and click OK twice. under Graphics. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. (Properties). 24 Click OK. 28 Under Title Text. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 501 . enter 5 mm. for Swatch Width.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. on the Options Bar. for Size. enter 25 mm.

you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. under 3D Views. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.29 On the Design Bar.rvt. double-click {3D}. 502 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.

4 In the Type Selector. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. select Material: Description. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Material: Area. click Family and Type. 9 Using the same method. Creating a Material Takeoff | 503 . select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Select Grand totals. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and click OK. and click Add. under Category. 12 Click OK. select Calculate totals. 5 On the Design Bar. select Family and Type. select Roofs. For Then by. Clear Itemize every instance.EPDM. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.Insulation on Plywood Deck . click Modify. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. under Available fields. Under Field formatting. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 11 Click the Formatting tab.3 While pressing CTRL. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.

under Available fields. and under Fields. and click Add. and click Properties. and click OK twice. for the Material: Cost field. 504 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .80 5.40 50. enter Estimated Cost. 24 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 17 Click Calculated Value. under Other. click Estimated Cost. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. for Name. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. for Fields. 22 For Field formatting. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 23 In the Material Takeoff. 20 Click OK.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. 21 Click the Formatting tab. 19 For Formula. click Material: Cost. click Edit. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2).

rvt. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. creating a generic tag to tag the family. regardless of category. For Units. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. For Rounding. and schedule the total distance of each path. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 505 . Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. you create a shared parameter file. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. adding the shared parameters to a family. 27 Click Field Format. select Fixed. You draw a travel path line. These shared parameters can be added to any family. click Edit.25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and are defined and stored in an external file. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. In this lesson. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. tag the line. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. you create an exiting plan for the building. ensuring consistency across families and projects. and reporting the shared parameters. click Estimated Cost. 28 Click OK 3 times. either within family components or within the project template. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Fields. for Formatting. select 2 decimal places.

rvt. and click Save. select Length. click New. and click OK.1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. for Name. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Name. and click OK. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. enter Travel Distance. for Name. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.txt. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. click Create. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 506 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . for Type of Parameter. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 9 Under Parameters. for File name. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 7 Under Parameters. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. enter Path ID. 11 Click OK. click New. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. click New. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Exiting. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups.rvt. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and click OK. click Add. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. and select Instance.rvt. under Parameters. under Parameters. click Add. Click Training Files. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 507 . group it under Dimensions. 7 For Group parameter under. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. in the Load into Projects dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and click OK. and click OK. 11 In the Family Types dialog. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click Load into Projects. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. If you have multiple projects open. click Family Types. 8 Select Instance. under Dimensions. 12 Click Apply. select Shared parameter. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. following the equals symbol (=). select Constraints.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. enter Length. for Travel Distance Formula. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click Select.rfa. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 14 If necessary. 13 On the Design Bar.

508 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Add.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rft. 17 Select Generic Tag. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. and click OK 3 times. 26 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Label.rft. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. under Parameters. click Select. click Label. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and click Open. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 24 On the Design Bar. select Travel Distance. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 19 On the Design Bar.

Level 1. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. After the lines are tagged. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. select Path ID.27 In the drawing window. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. 30 In the Save As dialog. 31 On the Design Bar. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. for File Name. under Floor Plans. double-click Exiting Plan .Tagging. and click Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Placing. and click OK. click Load into Projects. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.Tagging. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. Placing. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. and move it down. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. and press DELETE. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 509 .rvt is selected.rvt.rfa.

click Component. above the exterior door as shown. 510 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click in the center of the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.2 Zoom in to the corridor. 6 Move the cursor to the right. select Chain. 4 On the Options Bar.

12 On the Design Bar. click Component. clear Leader. for Path ID. and click (Properties). and click outside of the building. under Constraints. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Placing. select the 2 dashed travel lines. enter 1-1. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 511 . 13 While pressing CTRL. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify.Level 2. through the door. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. verify that Chain is selected. 17 On the Options Bar. double click Exiting Plan . and click OK. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Tagging.7 Move the cursor down. 8 On the Design Bar.

18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 512 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 Move the cursor up through the door. move the cursor to the left. and click. 21 On the Design Bar. and click above the door to the stair. 22 Click at the center starting point. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. click Component.

24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. for Path ID. click Modify.Tagging. Placing. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. enter 2-1. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 28 While pressing CTRL. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. and click OK.23 Move the cursor down. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click OK. 33 For Name. (Properties). Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click in the stair. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. 27 On the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 513 . under Constraints. under Category.

you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and click Rename. and click View. 40 Click the Formatting tab. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. enter 2-. for Filter by. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 36 For Filter by. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 43 In the Project Browser.rvt. and under Field formatting. for Filter. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Properties. click Edit. select Path ID. select contains. and click OK. 38 For Sort by. in the second field. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. under Available fields. select Travel Distance.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. in the third field. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and in the third field. click Training Files. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK twice. 42 Click OK. while pressing CTRL. in the first field. 46 In the Project Browser. and click Add. select Path ID. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. 41 Under Fields. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. 45 In the Rename View dialog. select Calculate Totals. enter 1-. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. 514 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Schedule/Quantities. under Other. right-click the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 35 Click the Filter tab. select Path ID and Travel Distance. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 39 Clear Itemize every instance.

and click the browse button. click the Fields tab. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. expand C .2 In the New Schedules dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. select the following fields.Interiors\C10 . and click OK twice. right-click Generic .Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 .Fixed Partitions.Partitions . under Categories. click C1010145 . 4 Under Available fields. for Assembly Code. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click OK. and click Properties. click the Value field. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Walls.152 mm. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 515 .

and click Next. 8 In the New Database dialog. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 6 Click Finish. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click Training Files. enter Revit_Project. 1 On the File menu. under Database. Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 3 Click New. select a location for the database file. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 9 Under Directories. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database.9 In the schedule. click OK in the dialog. Additionally. click the File Data Source tab. and click OK to create the database.mdb for Database Name. click Create. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click Next. 10 Close the exercise file. 10 When the confirmation displays.rvt. under Database Name. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 516 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN.

Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. For example. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. 13 Close the exercise file. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 517 . in addition to the Id column. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements.

518 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

519 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2008 projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 8 In this tutorial.

You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 520 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

Relocating a Project | 521 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Relocating a Project In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.

9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. click Edit/New. If you did that now. enter8 mm Head . expand Views (all). Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. you specify the new location of the project. and press ENTER. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. and click OK. and double-click South. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 10 On the View menu. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. for Elevation Base. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. 8 Select the Level 1 line. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. In the Name dialog. 6 Click OK twice. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Shared Elevation. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. 3 On the Options Bar. 522 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . The elevation of the other levels remains the same. By selecting the Level 1 line. select Shared. However. By entering 10000 mm in this step. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. The south elevation is displayed. The levels in the project are not shared. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Constraints. click (Properties). enter 10000 mm.

Shared Elevation. under Elevations. Relocating a Project | 523 . The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. click Modify. 12 In the Type Selector. as well as other views of the building model. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click North.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. 13 On the Design Bar. select Level : 8 mm Head .

In the Type Selector. 524 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. and select Levels 2-4.Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. select Level : 8 mm Head . and the Roof Plan level. the Penthouse level.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Dimensioning | 525 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. In Revit MEP. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. permanent dimensions are created automatically.16 If you want to save your changes. and angular dimensions. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. multi-segmented.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. radial. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. “Dimensioning” on page 525. and double-click Level 1. You place linear. In this case. expand Floor Plans. Dimensioning In this lesson.

snap to wall centerlines. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. and are created by selecting individual reference points. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. By default. dimensions are aligned. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. 526 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select it. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. click Dimension. select it.

Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.5 Move the cursor above the view. Creating Dimensions | 527 . indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. click Dimension. The lock displays as locked. and click to place the dimension. click Modify.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. above the plan view of the building. select the right endpoint of the planter. 17 Move the cursor up. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. and select it.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. 11 Using the same method. select the right side of the curtain wall. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. for Prefer. but below the first dimension that you placed. select Wall Faces. 528 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. and select its left exterior face. 15 Move the cursor to the right. 12 13 On the Options Bar.

select Wall faces. click Dimension.19 On the Basics tab. click Modify. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. For Prefer. click Modify. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 21 On the Design Bar. and select it. Creating Dimensions | 529 . and specify a point to place the dimension. 26 Select the radial dimension. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). Place a radial dimension with a Typ.

For Prefer.28 With the dimension still selected. and click OK. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. click Dimension. for Suffix. click (Properties). 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). enter Typ. verify Wall faces is selected. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.. 530 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 34 Select the horizontal line. 30 On the Basics tab.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 531 . you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. click Modify. When you dimension the wall. and click to place the dimension. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 531. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. you select only the wall. 37 On the Basics tab.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

and double-click Level 3. and select Widths. select Entire Walls. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. expand Floor Plans. Click OK. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. select Wall centerlines. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. For Pick. select Openings.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. Click Options. expand Views (all). 532 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning .

For example. 7 On the Basics tab. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. for a multi-segmented dimension. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. click Modify. in some cases. and click to place the automatic dimension string.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. However.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Witness Lines | 533 . and double-click Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. When you place dimensions. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 533.

7 Using the same method. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. select the right edge of the planter. select Individual References. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 534 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . For Pick. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify Wall centerlines is selected. and click to place the dimension. move the cursor down. and select it. click Dimension.

10 Using the same method. and specify a point to place the dimension. 11 Move the cursor down. Controlling Witness Lines | 535 . and select it. select the bottom right endpoint.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted.

13 On the Options Bar. select Wall centerlines. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. select it. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and drag the dimension down the wall. 536 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 18 Press and hold SHIFT. click Modify. for Prefer. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. and when the wall centerline highlights. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. click Dimension.

you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 537 . select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. After you create the new family type. click Modify. 20 Release SHIFT. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 537. and using the same methods. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 On the Basics tab.19 Release SHIFT. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style.

enter 3. click Duplicate. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. text font. for Text Size. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.dimension tick mark. For Text Font. and click OK. Under Text. enter Office Standard. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select CityBlueprint. select Arrow 30 Degree. 2 Click (Properties). for Tick Mark. click Edit/New. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. and select the lower dimension. 538 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 5 In the Name dialog.2 mm.

select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 7 On the Basics tab. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and select the bottom dimension. ■ Click OK twice. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. click Modify. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 539 . select another font. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 10 On the Basics tab.

you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. and how to add leaders to the text notes. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 540.11 Using the same method. create a new angular dimension type. 540 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the angular dimension on the planter. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson.

click Text.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. click (None). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. zoom to planter near grid line 5. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. but below the upper dimension string. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 541 . for Leader. and click and drag to create a text box. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.

If so. and click OK. for Text Size. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 542 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. click Duplicate. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. 7 Select the text box.5 In the text box. and click . 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Under Text. enter 6 mm. click Edit/New. under Graphics. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Arc Leaders. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter EXISTING BUILDING. click Modify.

click Text. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 543 . click Modify. and enter Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar.

click Edit/New. and click OK. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. Click Rename. 24 On the Design Bar. for Text font. enter Standard Notes.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). click Modify. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for New. Under Graphics. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 544 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice. Under Text. for Leader Arrowhead. select CityBlueprint. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. In the Rename dialog.

click Text. select Text: Standard Notes.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. click (Arc). over the Planting Bed text. 27 On the Options Bar. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 26 In the Type Selector. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 545 . 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. for Leader. click to place the text box.

33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and enter 457 mm Conc. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Wall. 546 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 32 If you want to save your changes.31 Click in the text box. click File menu ➤ Save As.

you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2008. plywood. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. 547 . For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. These components display at the required scale. like a standard door header condition. and metal studs. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.Detailing 9 In this tutorial.

and use the model as an underlay for the detail. as well as detail lines. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you trace over the building model geometry. You load detail components.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. and insulation objects. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you detail the view of the roof edge. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. add detail components.rvt. region objects. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. After you add components. They are also view specific. In order to detail from the building model. click Training Files. 548 | Chapter 9 Detailing . In the callout view. Detailing the View In this exercise. which means that all detail components.

select As underlay. click Duplicate. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the alert dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail. double-click the detail callout head. click . 16 Click OK twice.5mm.rfa. click Training Files.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 17 In the drawing area. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 406. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. and click Open. 8 Delete the component. and click OK. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. and click OK. select Corrugated Metal. click Repeating Detail. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 In the Name dialog. 7 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Detailing the View | 549 . You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. The roof overhang detail displays. Exact location is not important. 15 For Spacing. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar.

19 On the Design Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click (Move).18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. and on the Edit toolbar. and press DELETE. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Modify. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Load. ■ Click Modify. 550 | Chapter 9 Detailing . click Detail Component. 23 On the Options Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component.

Detailing the View | 551 . 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. you load them as a group from a single file.rfa. click Detail Component. 32 To properly orient the component. click Training Files. click Training Files. 25 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 30 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and place it in the detail view as shown. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. Because you still have several components to load. click OK. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Open. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.rvt. and click Open. 31 In the Type Selector.

Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. click the Flip instance arrows. 39 Select the horizontal segment. select Chain. 552 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. 38 Click Modify. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 36 On the Options Bar. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click Insulation.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. and click Modify.

Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. click (Move). select to near side. enter 140mm. 46 In the Type Selector.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. and on the Edit toolbar. For Offset. ■ Click Modify. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. 43 Click Modify. click Detail Component. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. Detailing the View | 553 .

Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Detail Lines. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 4 Click Modify. 52 Click Modify. select Thin Lines. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. and lock the component. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 554. they are view specific. 2 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Like detail components. 53 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 554 | Chapter 9 Detailing . meaning they display only in this view. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm.48 In the Type Selector. you add lines to your detail.

Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. For Offset. select Medium Lines. as shown. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. click Detail Lines. enter 10mm. For Offset. 11 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 555 . enter 10mm. and press ENTER. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. as shown. and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 7 In the Type Selector.

556 | Chapter 9 Detailing . select Thin Lines. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. draw the detail lines as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. select Chain. as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and clear Chain. click (Draw). 16 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector.

22 In the Project Browser. enter 10mm. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and click Properties. Adding Detail Lines | 557 . 24 On the View Control Bar. select Vapor Barrier. click ➤ Hide Crop Region.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select Do not display. click Detail Lines. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 26 In the Type Selector. When you turn the display model off. select the Penthouse level line. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. right-click. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. and click OK. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. For Offset. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and press ENTER. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar.

you add text notes to complete the detail.29 On the Design Bar. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it.rvt. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. click Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. select M_Break Line. click Text. 558 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 34 Proceed to the next exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Adding Text Notes” on page 558. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 32 Click Modify. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.

6 Click Modify. Click again to specify the location of the text box. enter Typ. Enter the text. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.. Adding Text Notes | 559 . 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. and click OK. for Text ➤ Suffix. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. 7 Select the dimension line. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Dimension. and click (Properties). and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.2 On the Options Bar.

enter Roof Overhang Detail . 10 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and click Rename. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Select All Instances. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. and click OK. and press DELETE. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. click Roof Overhang Detail. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. on the Options Bar. select all the coping linework. click 6 In the Filter dialog. (Filter Selection). Creating Detail Components In this exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click. right-click.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and save the exercise file. 7 Click Modify. and click OK. and selecting the chain. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. right-click. 560 | Chapter 9 Detailing . “Creating Detail Components” on page 560. while pressing CTRL. select a text note. pressing TAB. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail.Keynotes.

and the component can be placed in the detail.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 15 Use a window to select all linework. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Detail Component. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. enter Roof Edge. click . 24 On the Options Bar.rft. click Training Files. 18 In the Save As dialog. 23 Using a window.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Load into Projects. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 21 To place the component. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. clear Detail Items. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select the coping. 16 Click Modify. and click OK. 14 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. in the Type Selector. Creating Detail Components | 561 . The original linework remains selected. and click Open. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . select Medium Lines. and click Save. While pressing SHIFT. 22 Click Modify. for File name. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 25 In the Filter dialog. navigate to your preferred location. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog.

rvt.rfa. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. you place keynotes on objects. In the Keynotes dialog. “Adding Keynotes” on page 562. click Training Files. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. delete the underlying linework. and click Open. click Load. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Training Files. and click OK. 562 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. and click Open. click Keynote ➤ Element. 31 Using the same method used previously. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63mm Rigid Insulation. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.B5. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. Click to place the leader arm.26 Press DELETE. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. 27 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 30 In the drawing area. 2 In the alert dialog. 28 On the Options Bar.

use keynote 07645. use keynote 06160. For the 50 x 200.D11.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. use keynote 06110. For the metal coping.G1. use keynote 06110.F1. Roof Edge4. 6 Click Modify. 19mm Plywood. FasciaProfile_1. click Keynote ➤ Element. For the 50 x 150. click in the Value column. 11 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.F1. 12 On the Design Bar. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.C1. use keynote 09250. select the metal fascia with drip edge. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 06160. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties).D11. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to 07645. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.I1. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.D1. Adding Keynotes | 563 . use keynote 06110.

a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based.14 On the Design Bar. 5 In the drawing area. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 564.rvt. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.20 Ga. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. select Corrugated Metal. and select the right end point. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Load into Projects. for File name. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. select Medium Lines. and click Open. 9 On the Design Bar. select the left end point of the reference line. 4 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 22mm Corrugated Steel . 17 Keynote the component.A8. You do this in order to keynote the component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. using keynote 07460. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files. and click Save. 8 In the Save As dialog. 15 In the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Lines. navigate to your preferred location. click Detail Component.rft. 6 Lock the line. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Save the file. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. and click Modify. 564 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.

34 In the Name dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 565 . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Click OK 3 times. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 27 On the Design Bar. 30 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. You add the components to the project and keynote them. click Load. 29 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. and m_Light Line Detail Component. select m_Light Line Detail Component. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click Duplicate. 16 Select the component.11 Press DELETE. click Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. and click (Properties). m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and click . 22 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 24 While pressing CTRL. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. invisible. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Click Modify. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. and click Open. click the end points at the top of the roof. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 31 Select the component. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line.A1. click Detail Component. 13 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. click in the Value column. 25 Next. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 19 In the Name dialog. enter EPDM Membrane. and hidden) used in the view. 37 Click OK 3 times. select Medium Line Detail Component.

and assign it keynote 06110.A5. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. name the component Air Barrier. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 46 Click Modify. and click the lower end at the break line. 41 Select the component just added.G1. select Chain. 48 Using the same method used previously. 566 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and click . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. against the 3/4" plywood. 40 Click Modify. click Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar.38 On the Design Bar. 53 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. 47 Select the component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. and assign it keynote 07260. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. (Move). click Detail Component. 49 With the component selected. 52 In the Type Selector. 42 Using the same method used previously. and click . click Detail Component.

and click . leaving the detail component lines. 61 In the drawing area. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 50 x 200 Framing. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 567 . 60 On the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. and Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260.55 Click Modify. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. name the component Vapor Barrier. 58 Using the method used previously.A4. Air Barrier. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.

Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and press TAB. add a keynote for the component. and press ENTER. in the Type Selector. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. 67 In the drawing area.. 568 | Chapter 9 Detailing . Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 63 In the drawing area.rfa.rfa. and click . and assign it keynote 07210. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. name the component Batt Insul.A4. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. and close the text editor. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. Enter 07460. and press TAB. 69 Using the method used previously. The database file opens in a text editor. click Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 568.rvt. 68 Select the component. 3 In the text editor. select Invisible Lines. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.A9. Enter 07463. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. select the component. 71 Save the file. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 70 In the drawing area.A1. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. click Load into Projects.txt.

After you create a drafting view. 14 Save the file. select Absolute. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. These details do not update with changes to the building model. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. Each keynote displays as a simple number. under Path Type.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). and click OK. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 9 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element. Creating a Drafted Detail | 569 .A1. and click to place the note. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. and click Open. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. and click OK. select all the keynotes. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. click Browse. 11 Click Modify. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. click to place the leader. In the Type Selector. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. navigate to 07463. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. you learn how to create a drafted detail. 13 Click Modify. under Keynote Table. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model.txt. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number.

click Training Files. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click Open. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. select Black and white. and click OK. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). enter EPDM Metal Coping. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.dwg. and click Rename. For Layer/Level Colors. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 7 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout.rvt. right-click Drafting 1. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 570 | Chapter 9 Detailing . The detail is imported as an import symbol. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. select Center-to-center. select Reference other view. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 On the Options Bar. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. for Scale. The detail that you import is in DWG format. select 1 : 5. and click OK. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 570.

9 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. 6 Select the callout. and click OK. delete the existing value. click Modify. 12 Click OK twice. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. and click Properties. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 10 In the Rename dialog. click Edit/New. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Creating a Reference Callout | 571 . and double-click the callout. click Rename. enter Detail . for New. 5 Click Modify. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.

Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. The callout is updated with the sheet information. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter Header @ Sliding Door. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail./Sect. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet./Det. 3 On the View Control Bar. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. verify that the scale is 1 : 5.No Reference). for Name. double-click A105 .rvt. 572 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 18 Save the file. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). “Creating a Detail in the Drafting View” on page 572 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.Elev. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

for Name. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Gypsum-Plaster. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the left edge of the region. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. enter Gyp. .5mm. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Filled Region. select the width dimension. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 11 In the Name dialog. click . 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 14 Click OK 3 times. select Wide Lines. 18 While pressing CTRL. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 573 . Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 17 Click Modify. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 5 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. Board. click Duplicate. click Region Properties.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and enter 20. 19 In the Type Selector. and click OK.

click Finish Sketch. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 24 Select the mirrored region. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). Move the cursor up. and on the Edit toolbar.20 On the Design Bar. 574 | Chapter 9 Detailing . Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. (Draw). and click above the top of the region as the end point. click 22 On the Options Bar.

30 In the Name dialog. . select Medium Lines. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Region Properties. for Name. enter Wood . ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog.25 Click Modify. 33 Click OK 3 times. in the Type Selector. verify that the thickness is 19mm.Finish. click Filled Region. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select Wood . and click OK. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.Finish. click Edit/New. click (Align). Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. Draw a rectangle as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 575 . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. and select the right edge of the wood region. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch.

38 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63.5mm.

42 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add a reference plane
43 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 44 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick).

For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.

45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

46 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

576 | Chapter 9 Detailing

47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 48 Click Modify.

Add a door panel
49 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 50 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw).

■ ■ ■

For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER. Select Chain.

53 Draw the door panel outline:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.

54 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 577

Add mounting/sliding hardware
57 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 59 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.

60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.

Add mounting/sliding hardware
64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 65 On the Options Bar, click Load. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.

578 | Chapter 9 Detailing

TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

70 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 71 On the Options Bar, click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as a guide.

74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

Add detail lines
75 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 76 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 579

78 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar, click .

81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

82 Select the rectangle, and on the Edit toolbar, click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar, click .

(Mirror).

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

580 | Chapter 9 Detailing

87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

89 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left, as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 581

92 Select the line, and on the Edit toolbar, click

(Mirror).

93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER. 95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar, click .

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.

582 | Chapter 9 Detailing

99 Click Modify.

Add two break lines
100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 102 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

Add dimensions
104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 583

107 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown, and click Modify.

110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.

Add text notes to complete the detail
111 On the Design Bar, click Text. 112 In the Options Bar, click to create an arced leader.

113 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text. 114 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.

115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click

(Add Right Arc Leader).

116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

584 | Chapter 9 Detailing

117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

118 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command. 119 Save the file.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 585

586 | Chapter 9 Detailing

Finishing the Sheets

10

In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation, including:
■ ■

Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications, such as images and text into project sheets

■ ■

587

Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

Creating a Note Block
In this exercise, you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Finishing-Sheets.rvt.

Load a generic annotation family
1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click East.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote - Hexagon.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.

588 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown:

Create annotation marks for items requiring notes

10 With the tag selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, enter Seal existing doors and insulate, and click OK.

12 On the Edit toolbar, click

(Copy).

13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place a copy.

Creating a Note Block | 589

14 With the copy selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

15 For Text, enter Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag, enter B. 17 Click OK. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

19 On the toolbar, click

(Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.

20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building, as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays, and click.

590 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

21 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 22 Optionally, using the table as a reference, and moving counter-clockwise, continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration:
Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.

Create, format, and place a note block on a sheet
23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 24 In the New Note Block dialog, for Note block name, enter Exterior Construction Notes, and click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add. Select Text, and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.

Creating a Note Block | 591

■ ■

On the Formatting tab, for Heading, enter Mark, and for Alignment, select Center. On the Appearance tab, For Header text, verify Arial in the first field, enter 6 mm in the second field, and select Bold.

26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.

27 In the column header (text), enter Description. 28 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A103 - Elevations. 29 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Exterior Construction Notes, and drag it to the sheet.

30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.

33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt, and click Save.

592 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Using Drawing Lists
In this lesson, you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

Creating a Drawing List
In this exercise, you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add. Select Sheet Name, and click Add. On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does not equal, and in the third field, enter T. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.

4 Click OK. The drawing list displays.

5 In the list title field, enter Sheet Index. 6 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Sheet Index, and drag it to the sheet.

Using Drawing Lists | 593

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner, and expand the right column to accommodate the text.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame schedule, and so on). NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

Creating a Symbol Legend
In this exercise, you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally, you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a legend view
1 On the View menu, click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Symbol Legend, and click OK.

594 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Add symbols to the legend
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

M_Section Head - Filled Level Head - Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote - Hexagon : Tag

Create a text type
5 On the Design Bar, click Text. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector, you create a text type with the necessary size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

6 On the Options bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate, for Name, enter Legend Text, and click OK. 9 For Text Font, select Arial. 10 For Text Size, enter 3mm, and click OK twice.

Add text to the legend
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ ■ ■

Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag

Creating a Symbol Legend | 595

The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. double-click A102 . 19 In the Project Browser. expand Legends. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend.Unit 18. and double-click A101 .■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 596 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 16 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). click Typical Symbol Legend. click Modify.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and click to place it. under Sheets. and click to place it. select Viewport : No Titlemark. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

2 In the New Legend View dialog. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.20 In the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. 3 For Scale. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. For View. click New ➤ Legend. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. click Modify. 6 On the View Control Bar. enter 900 mm. and click OK.rvt. 21 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select Section. for Name. and press ENTER. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Legend Component. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Medium for Detail Level. select1 : 50. Creating a Component Legend | 597 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. For Host length. 5 On the Options Bar. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.

click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the second wall. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 598 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 12 In the Type Selector. click Text. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. and on the Options Bar. for Family.

pressing ENTER between component descriptions. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. click to add text without a leader. 19 Enter the following text. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. click to add text with a single-segment leader. for Leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. Creating a Component Legend | 599 . 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.13 On the Options Bar. The text note with leader is added to the legend. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking.

click Modify to end the command. 23 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. under Legends. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 600 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . select 4th Floor Wall Types. 25 In the Project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. 29 In the project Browser. and click New Sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 4. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select Level 4. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. under Floor Plans. The open drawings are both visible. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. right-click Sheets (all). drag it onto the sheet.

Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Creating a Component Legend | 601 . select the Wall Type 2 component. 33 In the floor plan view. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. click (Match Type). Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled.

click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. These changes can be due to owner requests. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. You can create a sequence of revisions. contractor inquiries. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. In this exercise. select Medium for Detail Level. 36 On the View Control Bar. or changes in building material availability. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. you 602 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 37 Optionally. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.35 Select the patio divider wall.

under Floor Plans. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. yet as concise as possible. 3 In the Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. When you use this option. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. In most instances. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. 7 Under Visible. 5 For Description. If Visible is not selected. When Issued is selected. click Revisions. if the active revision is number 1. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls.use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Using the table. the revision is locked and issued to the field. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. For example. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog.rvt. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. In general. enter a date. 2 On the Settings menu. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. double-click Level 4. If you select By Sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table | 603 . Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser.

Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 604 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 5 Select the partition. click (Move). which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Edit toolbar.rvt. 3 Select the divider. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save.8 Click OK. move the cursor up. double-click Level 4. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. you make changes to the project floor plan. under Floor Plans. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. including revision number and revision date. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Revision Cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Modify. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds | 605 . Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the partition you moved.6 On the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.

15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. double-click Level 4. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 16 Click OK. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.rvt. click the Annotation Objects tab. for Line Weight. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 606 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. you load a revision tag into the project. select 6.

You then issue a revision. and because the revision is the first in the project.4 On the Options Bar.rfa. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the Tags dialog. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. click Tags. Because you chose to number by project. under Sheets. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. In the Tags dialog. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 6 Click Load. the cloud is tagged as number 1. scroll down to Revision Clouds. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule.Unnamed. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. select Leader. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. on which you place a revised view. You do this by issuing the revision.rvt. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Working with Revisions In this exercise. you create a sheet view in your project. double-click A107 . Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. click OK. click Training Files. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you prevent further changes to the revision. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you need to add one. 10 In the drawing area. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 11 Click to place the tag. Working with Revisions | 607 . Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Tags dialog.

608 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . select Issued. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. under Add. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. and click OK. 6 In the Revisions dialog. click Revisions. click Revisions. NOTE After you issue a revision. You can continue to add revisions. select None for each issued revision.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. On the Settings menu. for Visible. click New. you can no longer modify it. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision.

such as images.JPG. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and place it on a sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.Title Sheet. under Sheets. click Training Files. Importing Image Files In this exercise.rvt. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to import information from other applications. 1 In the Project Browser. into a project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. double-click T . text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and spreadsheets.9 Click OK. Importing from Other Applications | 609 .

610 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Sheets. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.5 On the Design Bar.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser.doc text file in another window. click Text. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. double-click T . for Leader. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.rvt. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 6 Select the text. click to add text without a leader. 3 On the Options Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise.

enter Fixture Schedule. click Modify. This process may vary from system to system. 5 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.JPG. and click Save. click Modify.rvt. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.xls. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 9 On the Design Bar. 3 In Microsoft Excel. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.mdi. click Training Files. for File name. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. and saved as Fixture Schedule.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. double-click A102 .Unit 18. 4 Under Printer. Importing Spreadsheets | 611 . This exercise demonstrates a common method. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. with the new text box still selected. select the document writer. 10 On the Design Bar. click Desktop. under Sheets. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Revit MEP window. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click File menu ➤ Print. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit MEP. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.JPG. for Name. This step has been completed for you. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 612 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

or footprint. you break up the plan into sections. 613 . called dependent views. To effectively document this project. as well as a large lab building.Using Dependent Views 11 In this tutorial. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The large floor plan.

614 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

| 615 .

rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. select the crop region. 616 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 4 In the Rename View dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Training Files. The dependent view opens. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. enter Level 2 . you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. under Level 2. and click OK. right-click Level 2. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on Level 2. double-click Level 2. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. for Name.Aviary. 5 Click in the drawing area. under Floor Plans.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the drawing area.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 617 . confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and the model crop is the interior crop region.

16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).9 On the View Control Bar. enter Level 2 . 10 On the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. 15 Select the crop region. 618 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . right-click Dependent on Level 2. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. 13 In the Rename View dialog. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 14 Click in the drawing area. right-click Level 2. 11 In the Project Browser. for Name.Labs. click Zoom To Fit.

under Floor Plans. 20 On the Zoom flyout. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. click Zoom To Fit. click Matchline. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. click (Hide Crop Region). 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 619 .

and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 620 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. click Finish Sketch.

select Double Dash. under Floor Plans.Aviary. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 31 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 621 . for Line Weight. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and drag it onto the sheet. expand Sheets. and click OK. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. select 9. and click OK. for Name. click Level 2 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Unnamed. right-click A101 . 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 28 For Line Pattern. click the Annotation Objects tab. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 27 Under Matchline. enter Level 2 Aviary. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. and place the Level 2 . verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 .Labs dependent view on the sheet. 622 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click Modify.35 On the Design Bar. for Target view.Aviary is selected. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. click View Reference. 39 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. under Floor Plans.

double-click Level 2 . under Floor Plans. 46 In the Project Browser.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 623 . click (Show Crop Region). 45 On the Zoom flyout. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit.Labs. 44 On the Design Bar. 47 On the View Control Bar.Aviary. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. click Modify. for Target view. 41 On the Options Bar.

624 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. click the far right control. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. right-click. after modifying the annotation crop region. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.48 Select the crop region. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 49 If. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3).

After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 57 On the Zoom flyout. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 625 . and click Apply Dependent Views. right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. expand Level 1.51 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom To Fit. but are not placed on sheets. select all views in the list. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. 54 In the Project Browser. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. and click OK. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. click (Hide Crop Region). New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view.

4 In the Rename View dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. select the Crop Region. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 626 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . right-click South Elevation. enter South Elevation . The matchline is already placed in the view.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. expand South Elevation. and click OK. click Training Files.Left. 5 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The dependent view opens.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click South Elevation.

enter South Elevation . under Sheets. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 13 On the View Control Bar. right-click A103 Unnamed. and click Rename. for Name. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 16 In the Project Browser.Right. enter South Elevation. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. click (Hide Crop Region). cropping the view to the lab building. and click OK. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. for Name. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 627 . 7 On the View Control Bar. right-click South Elevation. and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the view. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. and click Rename. 11 Select the crop region. cropping the view to the aviary. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.

18 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser.Left. for Target view. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar.Right. under Elevations. 25 On the Options Bar. click View Reference. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. double-click South Elevation. click South Elevation . verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 22 On the Design Bar. and drag it onto the sheet. under Elevations. under Elevations.Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. click Modify. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 628 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. click South Elevation . and drag it onto the sheet. 20 In the Project Browser.

under Sheets (all). select Elevation: South Elevation . 30 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 629 . click Modify.Right. double-click A103 . for Target view. 31 In the Project Browser.28 On the Options Bar.South Elevation. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Select the crop region. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view.NOTE If the view references are not visible. 630 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . and click Activate View.

Viewing and Rendering 3 631 .

632 | Chapter 12 Viewing and Rendering .

Viewing 12 In this tutorial. 633 . you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. how to control fill pattern colors. More specifically. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views.

Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. locate the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. including elevation and three-dimensional views. expand Elevations. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. on the Standard toolbar. click Training Files. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. You create elevations. you learn how to access different views of the building model. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model.rvt. 634 | Chapter 12 Viewing . The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. click . sections. expand Views (all). and three-dimensional (3D) views. and double-click East.

and click Hidden Line. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. click Visibility/Graphics. click . The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. The default name of the view is {3D}. the east elevation. This change is applied only to the active view. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. 7 Click OK. This change is applied only in this elevation view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. Exploring the Building Model | 635 . scroll down and clear Window Tags. click the Annotation Categories tab.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. 6 Under Visibility.

and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. double-click My 3D View. . and click OK. You can pan. The view follows the movement of the cursor. under 3D Views. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel.9 On the View toolbar. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. zoom. 636 | Chapter 12 Viewing . . 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. expand Views (all). right-click {3D}. enter My 3D View. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. click to reorient the view. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. and expand 3D Views. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. Move the mouse to pan the view. and click Rename. click X to close the view. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel.

Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. and click View. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 637 . eye height. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. click Camera. and double-click Level 1. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 637.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). m_Viewing_Exercise. as shown in the following illustration. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Cameras define the eye point. After you specify the second point (the view target). outside of the dimension lines. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. expand Floor Plans. and distance from the target.

9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. down. Press and hold the left mouse button. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. Move the cursor up. 5 On the View menu. 638 | Chapter 12 Viewing . click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. and sideways to see how the view changes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. click Dynamically Modify View. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. Press and hold the left mouse button.

You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. Press and hold the left mouse button. 13 On the View menu. Change the camera position. Four views of the model display in the drawing area.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. click Tile. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 639 . height. and target 12 On the Window menu.

under 3D Views. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. 640 | Chapter 12 Viewing . double-click Level 1. 15 In the Project Browser. and click Show Camera. 16 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. double-click 3D View 1. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

20 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading. right-click. click to create a new 3D view. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 641 . 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. Click OK. click Model Graphics Style. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). and move it to another location. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. and click Element Properties.17 In My 3D View. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. In the Element Properties dialog. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. under Camera. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar.

23 In the Element Properties dialog.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. under Extents. A rotation tool is also displayed. as shown in the following illustration. 642 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and click OK. click View Properties. 22 On the View menu. A section box is displayed around the model. 24 Click the section box. select Section Box. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view.26 Click and hold the rotation tool.rvt. and rotate the section box around the model. Creating a Section View | 643 . click Section. “Creating a Section View” on page 643. and maximize this view. double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View In this exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise.

4 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. or in the Project Browser. 7 In the Go To View dialog.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and double-click Section 1. and click Find Referring Views. select Floor Plan: Level 1. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. View the section 5 To view the section. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. 644 | Chapter 12 Viewing . NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. right-click. double-click the section head. 8 Select the section line. expand Sections. click Modify. and click Open View. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. select the section view.

rvt. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view.9 On the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. m_Viewing_Exercise. 12 Select the section line. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Creating Elevation Views | 645 . 14 On the Design Bar. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 645. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Modify. under Floor Plans. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. double-click Level 1. click Elevation. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. move the cursor around the building model. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. Notice the change in section depth. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. click Modify. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. Notice the change in the view direction. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view.

9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. and click.a. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow.a by default. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. double-click Elevation 1 . 10 In the Project Browser. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. click Modify. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar.b. Elevation 1 . View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. double-click Level 1. zoom in. Do not select the arrow. 646 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Elevation 1 . The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. under Elevations.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.b.

you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. For example. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as Brick on CMU. in this case. click Save As.rvt. a shade of gray. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model.11 If you want to save your changes. and the insulation color to pink. in a compound wall. and open Common\c_Showroom. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and other families. where each layer is assigned a different material. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. such as the one below. In addition. and applies to phasing override materials as well. floors. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 647 . You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. roofs. click Training Files. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the File menu. This includes walls.

and double-click Wall/Floor Join .Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. select Masonry . View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Materials dialog. 3 In the Materials dialog. expand Sections (Section Head . The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. click Materials. and double-click 3D. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. select red. expand Views (all). 648 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 5 In the Color dialog. 2 On the Settings menu. 4 Under Cut Pattern. The surface pattern of the brick is black.Brick for Name. expand Views (all).Brick for Name.Level 3. click Color. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. click Materials. select Masonry . 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. and click OK twice. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure.Filled). Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu.

expand Floor Plans. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK twice. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 649. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. and double-click Level 1. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 649 . click View Properties. click Color. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. expand Views (all). The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.rvt. 11 In the Color dialog.10 Under Surface Pattern. c_Showroom. select white. 2 On the View menu.

12 On the View Control Bar. and click OK three times. select Solid fill for Name. 10 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. By default. although they may have 650 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 7 In the Color dialog. right-click. on the File menu. click Edit/New. and click Fine. and click OK. and click Element Properties. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. click Detail Level. If you create more than one plan region in a file. click Save As. select a shade of gray. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. . double-click Level 2. click Modify. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 14 If you want to save your changes. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. the plan regions cannot overlap each other.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine.

Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. line type. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 651 . and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. click Training Files.coincident edges. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. and you cannot control their visibility. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. or pattern. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit MEP. refer to the online Help for more information.rvt. line color. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit MEP files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Plan regions have a single property. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. expand Floor Plans. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. click Plan Region. the top and bottom clip planes. which is similar to the view range for plan views. 3 In the Level 1 view. click Lines. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. In the following illustration. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. and the view depth plane. the south elevation is also displayed. expand Views (all). view range. and double-click Level 1. click .View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. and click View. 652 | Chapter 12 Viewing . so you can view the height of the walls and windows.

When you select the plan region. click Finish Sketch. and click Element Properties. right-click. top and bottom clip planes. By selecting Parent View’s Level.■ ■ On the Design Bar. under Extents. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 In the View Range dialog. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. 4 Select the plan region. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. Press ESC to end the command. the line turns red. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 8 Click Apply. click Edit for View Range. and then click OK twice. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 653 . The plan region displays as a dashed green line.

11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 10 If you want to save your changes. 654 | Chapter 12 Viewing . on the File menu. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region.

and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. to place and render decals to create signs. 655 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 13 In this tutorial. and posters. billboards. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit MEP 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit MEP that is used to produce rendered views.

You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. When you complete these changes. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. the floor. In this exercise. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. After you create the perspective view. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. 656 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. you select a scene that defines the model environment. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 In the Materials dialog.Brick. 3 On the Options Bar. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 657 . 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. 9 Under AccuRender. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit for Structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. under Name. click Wall. 2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . click Training Files.Cavity Wall . click Materials. under Construction.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. click . right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. select Masonry .rvt. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed.Brick. and click the tab in the context menu. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Edit/New. verify that Co-house .

and click . under _accurender. 26 Click OK twice. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Metals. select Polished. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. 23 Under AccuRender.Running. 18 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 19 Click OK four times. select Site . 25 Under Name. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. click Duplicate. for Layer 2. 22 In the New Material dialog. select Carib. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Masonry and click Brick.Plain. 658 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Name. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog.200mm. under Construction. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. and click Aluminum. under _accurender. 11 Under Name. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Edit for Structure. click Materials. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Material Library.Asphalt. click Modify. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. .A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. Polished and click OK. 12 Click OK twice. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Aluminum. under Name.

select Aluminum. floor. click in the Material field. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 659 . and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. 32 In the Materials dialog. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. click Edit/New. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click Region Raytrace. verify that New is selected. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 29 On the Options Bar. 33 Click OK three times. under Name. and click OK. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. click . and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. and then click . select Exterior under Type. click No. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. select the curtain wall mullion again. Polished.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. you place two different types of trees on the building site. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). when you render an exterior view of the model. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. and double-click 1st Flr.rvt. 660 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 39 Proceed to the next exercise. In a later exercise. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. floor. producing a photorealistic effect. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. expand Views (all). Cnst. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 660.

Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . Create a new type of tree. Adding Trees to the Site | 661 . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. select M_Tree . 4 In the Type Selector. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. click Site Component.9 Meters. right-click in the Design Bar.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. and click to place a tree. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and click Site Component. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. click Modify. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. and click . select any of the deciduous trees. and click Site.

as shown in the following illustration. 662 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Other. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK twice.rvt. 12 In the Plant Library. and then click display the Plant Library. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. under accurender. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 662. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. click in the Value field for Plant Name. and click OK. expand Trees and Shrubs. and click OK. Black. enter Black Oak. under Identity Data. and click Deciduous. click Duplicate. select Black Oak for Type Comments. select Oak.8 In the Element Properties dialog. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. and place two black oak trees. click Edit/New. 13 Under Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. 15 Under Other. m_Cohouse.

Creating a Perspective View | 663 . click Camera. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. on the View tab of the Design Bar.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Cnst. The new perspective view is displayed. view open. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.

and click Show Camera. Cnst. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. Cnst. 664 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). view. double-click 1st Flr.

and environment settings that you use to render the view. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. lighting. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. m_Cohouse. and click Rename. place. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. double-click Exterior. you select a scene and specify time. enter Exterior. right-click 3D View 1.rvt. date. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 665. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 665 .7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click the Solar Angles tab. click Settings.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. under Scene Settings. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 6 Select By Date. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and click Sun. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 7 Under Date. 8 Under Time. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. Time. 666 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected.

27 On the Options Bar. and select Boston. 21 Click OK twice. select Grass. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 18 Click Material. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. click Site. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. select Ground Plane. under Scene Settings. and enter bo.) 14 Click OK. under Background Color. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Dark. click Raytrace. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. and click OK. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. under _accurender. 11 Scroll down. select Autumn for Plant Season. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 667 . MA.20 for Cloudiness.00 (many clouds. click . and click OK. 26 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Material Library. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. click Environment. The Ground Plane tab displays. USA. 12 Click the Settings Tab. Rye. click Capture Rendering. 13 Enter . 20 In the Name list. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click No. click Image Size. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. 10 Click in the Cities list. under Scene Settings.9 Click the Place tab. 16 In the Environment dialog. select Good for Quality. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. 17 Under Advanced.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. define the view and render scene settings. and finally. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. m_Cohouse. 668 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click 2nd Flr.30 On the Design Bar. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. expand Floor Plans. To create the rendered scene. Adding RPC People In this exercise. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). “Rendering an Interior View” on page 668. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. expand Renderings. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.rvt. 32 If you want to save this exercise. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. Cnst. on the File menu.

select M_RPC Female: Cathy. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). click Component. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. Adding RPC People | 669 . 5 On the Options Bar. select Rotate after placement. 4 In the Type Selector.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. 7 Repeat steps 4 .

“Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 670. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 670 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.8 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cohouse. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.rvt.

3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 671 .■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.

enter 229 mm for Width. right-click 3D View 1. enter 178 mm for Height. and click Rename. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. click the dimensions for Size. under Size. 672 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar.9 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. click to display the 3D view of the building model. 12 On the View menu. click View Properties. 11 On the View menu. click Modify. Grips are displayed on the section box. under Extents. 14 On the Design Bar. A section box is displayed around the building model. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the section box. and click OK. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 673 . enter Interior. select Section Box. and click OK.

click Environment. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under Scene Settings. place. and environment settings used to render the view. select Interior. click OK. 10 Click the Place tab. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Background Color. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you reduce the rendering time. click the Solar Angles tab. 9 Under Time. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. date. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. and click Sun. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 14 Click Save. By limiting the geometry. you create a render scene to specify the time. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. under 3D Views. and click OK. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. click Settings. 7 Select By Date. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. on the Main tab. and click Save. and select Boston. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. m_Cohouse. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 674 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 674. 12 Scroll down.rvt. select New. MA. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 17 In the Environment dialog. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 Click the Settings tab. 8 Under Date. under Scene Settings. 4 Under Type. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. USA.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. and enter bo. 11 Click in the Cities list. and enter Interior Scene for Name. Time.

under accurender. select Summer for Plant Season. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 19 Click Material. m_Cohouse. such as windows and doors. under Use View’s Section Box. click Radiate.18 Under Advanced. under 3D Views. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 675 . Dark. 5 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. double-click Interior. You can select families with transparent materials. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 675. click OK. 20 In the Material Library. The Ground Plane tab displays. 24 Under Scene Settings. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. Curtain Wall 1). 21 In the Name list. click Site. as daylight sources.rvt. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. select Ground Plane. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. 22 Click OK twice. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. and click OK. Rye. select Grass. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. click Daylights. select {3D}.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. the following rendered view is displayed. 9 If you want to save your changes. which can take several minutes. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. on the File menu. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. 7 On the Design Bar. begins. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. 8 On the Options Bar. click Raytrace. . select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. When radiate completes.The radiosity process. 676 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. click Training Files. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. and change unit formats as desired. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 677 . but you can also define it in a 3D. If you prefer to use Metric values. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.rvt. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. In a plan view. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit MEP software. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. The walkthrough path is a spline. and ends in the far corner of the living room. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. elevation. and open Common\c_Townhouse. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. click Settings ➤ Project Units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. or section view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. proceeds through the dining room. you must select or define a scene. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit MEP 2008. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson.

5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. expand Views (all). click Walkthrough. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. of the walkthrough. expand Walkthroughs. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. and click to specify the start point. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. or the first key frame. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. on the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. click . and click the tab in the context menu.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 678 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 1st Floor.

click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and select the crop boundary. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 12 On the View menu. 14 Click . 11 Under Change. select the crop boundary. If it is not.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click Edit Walkthrough. Creating a Walkthrough | 679 . enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. verify Field of view is selected. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. 13 On the Options Bar.

“Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 680. 16 On the Options Bar. under Extents. click Edit Walkthrough. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. c_Townhouse. press ESC. proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. The walkthrough plays. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). and click OK. enter 1 for Frame. 680 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. 17 Click . click . double-click 1st Floor. and click OK. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. clear Far Clip Active. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time.

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 681 . select Path for Controls. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Options Bar.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.

4 Under Format. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. and click OK. under Walkthroughs. specify 15 for Frames per Second. 682 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Video Compression dialog. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. double-click Walkthrough 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. shaded. and then click to play the walkthrough. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser.7 Click the third key frame position. without opening Revit MEP 2008. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. If you are unsure of what option to use. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and click Save. 2 In the Save As dialog. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 682. It produces files that are larger than compressed files.rvt. select <Shading> for Display mode. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. When you export the walkthrough. 9 On the Options Bar. The AVI is recorded. or with AccuRender raytracing. c_Townhouse. 3 Under Output Length. 1 On the File menu. hidden line. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. shaded with edges. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. click Edit Walkthrough.

click Save As. on the File menu. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. Recording the Walkthrough | 683 . perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. specifying the number of frames. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. reducing the size of the image. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

684 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

685 . you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. In this tutorial. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.Creating Solar Studies 14 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. More specifically.

you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. 686 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . expand Floor Plans.Courtyard View In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Camera. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. click Training Files. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. A 3D view is created. and double-click 01 Entry.rvt.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. Creating a Solar Study . expand Views (all). as shown. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis.

click to reorient the view. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View. and click Rename.4 On the View toolbar. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 687. expand 3D Views. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. you create a section cutaway view. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. double-click 01 Entry. as shown. click Save As. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. enter Solar Study . if necessary.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 10 On the File menu. 9 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 687 . 6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. click Modify. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house.

Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. click Section. 5 On the Design Bar. click 10 On the View toolbar. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and click OK. and click Rename. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click the section head. 688 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 8 In the Rename View dialog.3 On the Design Bar. to reorient the view. click Modify. click . 6 To view the section. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. expand Sections. right-click Section 1.

NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. then select Medium. 18 On the File menu. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. to expand the dialog. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 16 On the View Control Bar. and under Orient to a View. and click OK. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. and click OK. click Save.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. In some cases. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. 13 On the Design Bar. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. double-click 01 Entry. then Fine. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 689 . 17 To hide the section box. as shown. you create a plan cutaway view. 14 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. clear Section Boxes. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 689. Typical plan views. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. 15 In the Rename View dialog. including the house. under 3D Views. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. do not display many elements in 3D. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. right-click {3D}. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. under Floor Plans. click Callout. click Modify.

click . 11 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 690 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. as shown. and under Orient to a View. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Modify.4 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. to reorient the view. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. as shown. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click 8 On the View toolbar.

double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.15 Select the Roof. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click Rename. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 16 On the View Control Bar. so you can see into the building from the top. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. and click OK. click Save. 21 On the File menu. under 3D Views. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 691 . right-click {3D}. 20 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

and click OK. enter Summer Solstice. expand Views (all). and double-click Solar Study . and time range. .Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. click . click . Los Angeles. and time. For the Multi-Day solar study. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. expand 3D Views. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. For this study. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study .Boston. date range. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. leave the slider at 50. single-day. USA. for City. or multi-day solar study. 10 Under Place. CA. date. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. For the Single-Day solar study. You can create a still. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. Creating Solar Studies . click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. MA. 692 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and click Duplicate. select Los Angeles. Click the Single-Day tab.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab.Courtyard View. 3 Select Cast Shadows. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 2 On the View Control Bar. you specify the location.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. USA is selected. you specify the location. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Name dialog.

enter Winter Solstice. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 693 . “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 693. select December 22. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. select June 22. select Winter Solstice. for Date. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . 2006. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. under Frame. 6 On the View Control Bar. For Time Range. Los Angeles is selected. confirm that Summer Solstice. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 2006. Under Frame. 2 On the View Control Bar. Clear Ground Plane at Level. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 19 On the File menu. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. 16 In the Name dialog. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. ■ For Time Interval. click OK. enter 10 and press ENTER. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Los Angeles. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click OK. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click . and click OK. click . and click Duplicate. 8 On the Options Bar. on the Single-Day tab. click Save. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click To display the next key frame. 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . . click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.Courtyard View is currently displayed. and click OK.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 14 In this case. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter 20 and press ENTER.

click To play the animation from start to finish. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. on the Single-Day tab. Click and enter Dining.■ To display the next sequential frame. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. Click outside of the text box to end the command. 14 On the Options Bar. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Summer Solstice. Los Angeles. click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click Text.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. approximately as shown. click . double-click 01 Entry. 694 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. click . under Floor Plans. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. The solar study animation plays. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 13 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. and click OK. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house.

Exporting the Study as AVI | 695 . click . 11 To display the section box. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Summer Solstice. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. select Section Boxes. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. as shown. and click OK. 5 In the Project Browser. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. and click OK. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Options Bar. Los Angeles. as shown. click Lines. expand 3D Views. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. 6 On the View Control Bar. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Single-Day tab. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

as shown. enter 450 in the first field (width). and click OK. For Save as type. 14 Click outside of the section box. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 15 To hide the section box. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab.12 In the drawing area. 696 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically.Los Angeles. select AVI Files. For Frames per second. and enter 5 to 50. For File name. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. verify that the value is set to 15. if necessary. select the section box. Under Format. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . To maintain the proportions of the frame. select Frame range. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. For Dimensions. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. verify that Hidden Line is selected. for Model Graphics Style. Under Output Length.

NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. select Winter Solstice. and click OK. TIFF. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Under Output Length. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. For File name. and enter 5 to 10. click Save. or frame. 8 In the Save As dialog. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 697. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.Los Angeles. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. such as JPEG. of the animation separately. For Save as type. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. or GIF. select PNG. click Save. 18 In the Save As dialog. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . For Frames per second. Under Format. NOTE When you export to PNG. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you open each image. depending on the Frame Range. for Compressor. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 20 On the File menu. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 697 . Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. verify that the value is set to 15. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. and click OK. click Save. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. enter 450 in the first field (width). or any single-frame format. click . To view the animation. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. In this example. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Frame range. BMP. on the Single-Day tab. For Dimensions. for Model Graphics Style. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. 698 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Save. under 3D Views. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day.9 On the File menu. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. and on the View Control Bar. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 699 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. as shown. 5 Select the roof.

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click the Multi-Day tab. 17 On the View Control Bar. clear Section Boxes. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 700 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and click Save. On the Annotation Categories tab. Click the Desktop icon.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. and click OK. In the Save As dialog. specify 2:00 pm. 18 On the File menu. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click OK. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. select One week. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. and click OK. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 8 On the View Control Bar. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . USA.Boston. MA. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. For Time Interval.Los Angeles .Week Interval. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 In the Name dialog. For Time. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. click Save. for File name enter 2pm . and click OK. and click Duplicate. for Compressor. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.

2 On the View Control Bar. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . For example. and click OK. click .Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Then. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Orienting to True North | 701 . so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. specify 11:00 AM for time. 11 Under Date and Time. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. on the Still tab. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click .rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and select Winter Solstice. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select Cast Shadows. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. In this exercise. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 9 Under Date and Time. click Apply. click the Still tab.

18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. and select Winter Solstice. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click the Still tab. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. under Floor Plans. In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry. Notice that the project rotates in the view. select True North. click OK. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Orientation. 702 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . On the Options Bar.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. 13 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Graphics. and click OK. click . in the Angle from Project to True North field. click OK. and select View Properties.

and click OK. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. are saved with the project. 21 On the View Control Bar. select Summer Solstice. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click Summer Solstice. click the Single-Day tab. click . 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. for File name. verify that AVI Files is selected. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. including the angle from True North. and click Apply. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. Orienting to True North | 703 . enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. For Save as type. 19 In the Project Browser.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. click the Still tab. In the Save As dialog. Los Angeles. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. under 3D Views.

under Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. Since a rendered image is temporary. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. for Resolution. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. and click Save. for Scene. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and select View Properties. In this exercise. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. for Dimensions. 29 On the File menu. click Save. under 3D Views. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655 for additional information on rendering. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room.■ Under Format. select Draft (75 dpi). 2 In the Project Browser. enter 600 in the first field. Click the Desktop icon. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. In the Element Properties dialog. and exporting it as a JPEG image. 704 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. select Project North. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Rendered views do not have this limitation. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. capturing it. and click OK. and click OK. for Orientation. 28 Once you are finished with the study. click Raytrace. under Graphics. Right-click in the drawing area. click GO. for Compressor. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.

5 On the Design Bar. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. On the Options Bar. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. Rendering an Interior View | 705 . for Save as Type. The scene is rendered in high resolution. 7 Review some captured images of the building. select JPEG. In the Save As dialog. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. click Save.■ ■ On the Options Bar. under Renderings. click Capture Rendering. for Resolution. select Presentation (300 dpi). double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. In the Project Browser. click Export Image. click GO. and click Save.

706 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering." In Revit MEP. and Section Boxes. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. there are several options for expressing the architecture. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit MEP can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655. In this tutorial. sections." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. type. the Linework Tool. Whether the audience is the general contractor. Advanced Model Graphics. A majority of tools in Revit MEP 2008 are intended to describe number. elevations.Presentation Views 15 In this tutorial. In this series of exercises. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. an outside reviewer. or the client. a consultant. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. length. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 707 . For the realistic approach. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. you explore the stylistic approach. To express texture beyond material specifics. and details.

708 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Using the pre-built building model.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Co-house.

click Training Files. you create a presentation floor plan. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise.rvt. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 709 . expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans. right-click 2nd Flr. you create a copy of the plan. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

elevations. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Annotation Categories tab. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Floor Plans.2 In the Project Browser. sections. click Save As. 10 On the File menu. dimensions. 8 Click OK. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. click in the drawing area. click the Scale control and select 1:100. and click OK. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. this represents the view getting smaller. 7 Under Visibility. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Down Arrow. expand the Stairs category. UP Text. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and so on in this view. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. exit the menu. Up Arrow. 710 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and clear DOWN Text. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Cnst. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Notice that no annotations display in this view.

specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Under Shadows Properties. Time and Place. and click Save. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 Under Settings. MA.rvt. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click . Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. double-click it in the Project Browser. select Sun and Shadow Settings. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Cast Shadows. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 5 Under Settings. you can create. click the Place tab. At that place. ■ Under Intensity. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. modify. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. Within a Project. The higher the number. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 711. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. specify 35 for Shadow. navigate to the folder of your choice. 2 On the View Control Bar. on the Still tab. and click OK.11 In the Save As directory. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. the darker the shadows. click for Place. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings.rvt. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 711 . 8 Select Boston. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. USA for City. select By Date.

11 Click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you can enter any city you wish. click OK. click . and select 1st Flr. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. under Settings. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. however. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. and click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 17 On the File menu. be aware that if you enter a different city. Cnst. 712 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 713. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Save. clear Ground Plane at Level. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. click OK.NOTE For this step. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. and click to place it. 4 In the Views dialog. click Sheet. and click View. and notice a view title displays. select Arch Portrait. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 713 . select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. TIP If the View tab is not available. click Modify. click Add View. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 6 On the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar.

under Graphics. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. select No for Show Title. click OK. 714 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. and click Activate View. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click Edit/New. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 9 On the Options Bar. enter Presentation. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Duplicate. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. To accomplish this. For this analytique. 12 In the Name dialog. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title.

TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Name dialog. click . click . If necessary. under Graphics. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 715 . You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. fill properties. click . 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 20 On the Options Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. click Filled Region. click Edit/New. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. for Fill Pattern.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Chain. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click Region Properties. 17 In the Type Selector. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. click Duplicate. When you are finished drawing the chain. 18 On the Options Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. and the boundary of the region. select Invisible Lines. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. enter Solid Black.

29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. scroll down. 30 On the Design Bar. and click View Properties. select Solid Fill. 716 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 716. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. under Identity Data. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 34 On the File menu. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. under Name.

Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. under Pattern Overrides. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Views (all). right-click South. under Visibility. and click OK. expand the Doors category. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. expand Elevations. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. on the Model Categories tab. click Override. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. and click Rename.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Visibility. scroll up. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. enter Presentation South Elevation. 3 In the Rename View dialog. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. 2 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. click in the drawing area. and clear Elevation Swing. 9 Click OK. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. right-click Copy of South. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. exit the menu. click in the Walls row. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 717 . TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls.rvt. clear Visible.

and click OK. 13 Under Intensity. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 718 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 Under Shadow Properties. click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click Save. click . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 20 On the File menu. select By Date. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. 16 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. under Settings. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. select Cast Shadows. specify 35 for Shadow. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 718. Time and Place. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view.

expand Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 719 . under Views (all). select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Notice the viewport displays a view title.Presentation. 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click A105 .rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

5 In the Type Selector. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Notice the view title no longer displays. select Viewport: Presentation. 7 On the Design Bar. 720 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Modify.

9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 721. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 721 .8 On the File menu. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Save.

722 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 4 Add the section shown below. To accomplish this. 3 On the Options Bar. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).rvt. expand Sections (Callout 1). and double-click Section 2. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Section. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Section 2 is added to the building model. select 1: 100 for Scale. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. To fit correctly in the analytique. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

11 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. right-click Callout of Section 2.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Under Visibility. double-click Presentation Section 2. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). click the Model Categories tab. enter Presentation Section 2. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 723 . Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. click in the Walls row. clear Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. click Override. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Callout. click Modify. under Sections (Callout 1). under Pattern Overrides. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. select 1 : 100 for Scale. 12 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.

Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. under Extents. Revit MEP displays 2 boundaries. clear Crop Region Visible. scroll up. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements.17 Under Visibility. click . expand the Doors category. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. When you select the crop boundary. and clear Elevation Swing. clear Annotation Crop. 724 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 22 On the Options Bar. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. 20 Click OK.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. select Cast Shadows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. In addition. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. open the Project Browser and. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 725 . Under Intensity. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 725. under Sections (Callout 1). Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar. double-click Presentation Section 2.rvt.24 On the File menu. Under Shadows Properties. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. click Save. Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. specify 35 for Shadow. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

10 Under Silhouette Edges. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. and click OK. click Save. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. under Silhouette Edges. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. was added to this dataset for training purposes. 726 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 5 In the Name dialog. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. click OK. NOTE The line style. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. under Settings. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 727. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. click . click Duplicate. select Directly. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. select Relative to View. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Silhouette Edges. and click OK. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. 11 On the File menu. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select Override Silhouettes. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.In the steps that follow.

4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. click Add View. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. select Section: Presentation Section 2. and click to place the selected view. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. under Sheets (all). The view title no longer displays. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise.rvt.Presentation. double-click A105 . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 727 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation.

you click to specify the start radius. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. under Sections (Callout 1). 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. click . double-click Section 2. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. and press ENTER. To rotate an object. In the steps that follow. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 9 On the Edit toolbar. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. Using a clock as a reference. 728 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

and drag it up and to the left as shown. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . the callout rotates 180 degrees.Presentation. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 729 .After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 730. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. After applying the view template to a new section view.15 On the Design Bar. enter Presentation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Callout 1). you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. and click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2. 730 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 3 In the New View Template dialog. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 16 On the File menu. click Create View Template from View. click Modify. click Save. 2 On the View menu. 4 In the View Templates dialog.rvt.

annotations. Now. select Viewport: Presentation. Working with a Presentation View Template | 731 . under Sections (Type 1). and click Activate View. and click OK. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Add View. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 16 On the View menu. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. Notice the furniture. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 1. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click Rename. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. 15 Right-click the viewport. select Section: Presentation Section 1. click View Properties. and elevation swings no longer display. 12 In the Views dialog. right-click Copy of Section 1. and click Add View to Sheet. click Apply View Template. lighting fixtures. you can simply apply the presentation view template. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 .Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. select Presentation. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Section 1. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 14 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Select View Template dialog.

20 On the File menu. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and click OK. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. In this exercise. 18 Right-click the viewport. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save.17 In the Element Properties dialog. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 732. and click Deactivate View. such as a tracery window or column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 732 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail. under Graphics. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet.

and click OK. select the callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Working in a Callout Analytique | 733 . 4 In the Project Browser. After you add the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Section 1. and click Rename.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). 6 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). click Modify. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Callout. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. enter Presentation Callout.

8 Right-click. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. and click View Properties. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. clear Crop Region Visible. 734 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. clear Annotation Crop. and click OK.

click Modify. select Custom for View Scale. click View Properties. and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. and move it into the position shown below.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 17 On the View menu. and click Activate View. select Section: Presentation Callout.Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View. select Viewport: Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 735 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. double-click A105 . 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 15 On the Design Bar. click Add View.

you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. click Region Properties. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. 736 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . double-click Presentation Callout. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. and make adjustments as necessary. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. select Solid Black for Type. In the steps that follow. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. When finished. 23 On the Design Bar. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. activate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. click Filled Region.

and sketch the rectangle shown below. and click Activate View. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . click Filled Region.26 On the Project Browser. 29 On the Options Bar. click .Presentation. under Sheets (all). Working in a Callout Analytique | 737 . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.

under Extents. click View Properties. 738 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 31 On the View menu. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Crop Region Visible. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. click Finish Sketch. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 33 Select the crop region.

under Extents. You then add each view to the presentation sheet.34 On the View menu. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save. click View Properties. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 739 . and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. clear Crop Region Visible. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and apply shadows to the views. 37 On the File menu. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 739. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.

Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. double-click Isometric. select Cast Shadows. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Orient ➤ Southwest. and click 1 : 200. specify 35 for Shadow. 3 On the View Control Bar. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. click . 2 On the View menu. under 3D Views. 740 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Scale control.rvt. Under Intensity. 7 In the Name dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Shadows Properties. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. under 3D Views. select Override Silhouettes. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 9 Click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. Cnst. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 16 In the Rename View dialog. click View Properties. right-click Isometric. and click OK. select Section Box. double-click Isometric 2. right-click Isometric 1. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 741 . 11 Under Silhouette Edges. in the list. under 3D Views. 18 On the View menu. Select Relative to View. and click OK. under 3D Views. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. under Settings. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click Rename. Select 1st Flr. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 15 In the Project Browser.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Isometric 1. under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. under Extents. and click Rename. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser.

make a duplicate of the view. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 2.20 Select the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. 742 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. 23 In the Project Browser. You can use this to rotate the section box. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. When you are finished. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click Rename. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric 2.

When you are finished. 26 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 743 . under 3D Views. In such a case. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. the stairs and railings may display. double-click A105 . click Modify on the Design Bar. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.24 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 34 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. 31 To hide the section box. 25 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. clear Section Boxes.Presentation. Next. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. Notice the section box no longer displays. and click OK. 29 Select the section box. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click Isometric 2. under Sheets (all). clear Section Boxes. double-click Isometric 3. enter Isometric 3. either adjust the plane location.

drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. 36 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the filled region partially covers the view.35 In the Project Browser. 744 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . in the Type Selector.

You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. This will make it easier to draw lines. 47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 45 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 745 .Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Solid Black for Type. 43 On the Design Bar. select Transparent for Background. and on the Options Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Select the poche filled region. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. The image below shows the lines redrawn. and click Activate View. click Lines. click Region Properties. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. and then click Edit/New. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. 44 Using the drawing tools. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. click Edit. 42 Click OK twice. select Concrete for Type.

Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. you add it to the presentation sheet. under Floor Plans. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Save. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. 746 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you create the final view for the analytique. a cutaway perspective view. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 746. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.49 On the File menu. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. then you specify the eye direction and range. double-click 1st Flr. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. click Camera. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Cnst.

specify 35 for Shadow. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click . and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.The view opens immediately. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 747 . Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Under Shadows Properties. Under Intensity. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it.

8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. under Extents. click View Properties. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. select Section Box. and click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice the controls that display on each plane. under Silhouette Edges. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. and click OK. 748 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 9 Under Silhouette Edges. A section box now cuts through the building model. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. 12 Select the section box. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. select Override Silhouettes. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

After placing it. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab.14 Select the crop boundary. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. and click OK. click Size. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). 19 To hide the section box. Clear Crop Region Visible. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 749 . under Change. select Scale (locked proportions). Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under 3D Views. enter 165 mm for Width. you must specify the actual size of the image. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 21 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 18 To hide the crop region. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. and click OK. clear Section Boxes.Presentation. click View menu ➤ View Properties. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 9 In the Name dialog. and click OK. specify a text size of 6 mm. click Duplicate. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. select the same font as the title. specify a text size of 40 mm. under Text.rvt. click Text. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 750 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Save. click Edit/New. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Text : Title. enter Title.22 On the File menu. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 750. enter Description. click OK. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select a font. under Text.

click Modify. Annotating the Analytique | 751 . select Text : Description. 15 In the Type Selector. click Save. 17 On the Design Bar.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the File menu.

752 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

Creating Families 4 753 .

754 | Chapter 16 Creating Families .

they are still related and come from a single source. thus the term family. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit MEP 2008 are “family based. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. each with a different size. 755 .” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit MEP to help you manage your data and make changes easily. material set. shape. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. In this tutorial.

The basic walls system family. and furniture. Revit MEP has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit MEP and comprise principle building components such as walls. and roofs. exterior. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit MEP recognize it as a particular component type. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. You can load them into projects. floors. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Standalone families include columns.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit MEP is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. There are. because there is only one file to track. generic. Using the Family Editor. and partition wall styles. transfer them from one project to another. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. and when and how to use it. and roofs are examples of these types of families. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. while many more are stored in component libraries. such as a dome roof. exceptions to this rule. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. 756 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . for example. This makes file management much easier. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an .rfa extension. In this lesson.rfa extension. has wall types that define interior. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. but you cannot create new system families. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. In addition. Walls. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Host-based families have components that require hosts. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit MEP and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. trees. You also learn about the Family Editor. however. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. foundation. floors. For example.

The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. elevation. how to access it. such as plan. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. you can drag it into the document window. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. or 3D. In this section. In the final exercise. Load Family command on the File menu. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. However. 2 On the File menu. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. Introduction to the Family Editor | 757 . click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. it is saved with the project. you learned about the different types of Revit MEP families and when to use them. for example. After the family has been loaded in the project. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. To add a family to your project. you learn about the Family Editor. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. and when to use it. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. custom wall treatments. You create in-place families only within the current project. if you change the original family. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. and also a standalone furniture family component. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. or you can load it using the Load From Library. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family.

and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. and click Open. select the appropriate template. consider checking the web library and other web resources. When to use the Family Editor During the design process.rfa extension and it will open Revit MEP in the Family Editor. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. In this case. 5 Finally. navigate to a family file. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. you can double-click any file with an . open it in the Family Editor. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point.In this exercise. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. you learn when to use the Family Editor. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. and then load it into the project. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. if you have exhausted your external resources. When the family opens. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. 3 Next. and click Open. If you find a close match. Within the Windows® environment. such as newsgroups. you can click File ➤ Open. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. it should be available within the Type Selector. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. it opens within the Family Editor. To start a new family. With Revit MEP open. presume it is a bay window that you require. how to access it. modify it as needed. 758 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . 9 Save the newly-defined family. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters.

you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. You create a furniture family. you learn how to create a different type of component. and several annotation families. not within the Family Editor. In each lesson. In addition. Using the installed templates. a lighting fixture. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. 759 . When you create an in-place family. you create an in-place family. you create it within the project file. you learn how to create specific Revit MEP 2008 families.

you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. 760 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and thickness. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. The door type has a variable height and width. height. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. you draw the plan view components for the new door family.

7 Enter ZF. click Training Files. are also displayed. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. click New ➤ Family. click Tile. and represent the door opening profile. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Window menu. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 761 . part of the door properties. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 6 Maximize the window. Level. select Doors [projection]. Labelled dimensions. click Symbolic Lines.rft. 4 On the View menu. 9 In the Type Selector. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. Floor Plan: Ref. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Notice the four tiled views. 2 On the File menu. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. click .

Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 762 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. select Width for Label.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 763 . select Thickness for Label. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 17 On the Options Bar. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening.

along with the witness line controls. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click the down arrow button. and select the command from the menu. 21 On the Design Bar. select Plan Swing [cut]. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. When drawing an arc from center and end points. 23 On the Options Bar. then you specify each end point. click Symbolic Lines. click . you first specify the arc center. 24 Enter SI. 22 In the Type selector. as shown. In the image below.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. 764 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location.

and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 765 . enter 50 mm for Depth. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click . 4 In the Work Plane dialog box.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. and click OK. click Lines. 2 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 3 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Exterior. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 765. click Set Work Plane. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 6 On the Options Bar.

double-click Left.8 On the Design Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Dimension. then click to specify the dimension witness line. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. click Finish Sketch. 766 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Level. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. and Fine are selected. 13 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. Left/Right.12 On the Design Bar. select Thickness for Label. and When cut in Plan/RCP. select Front/Back. click Modify. under Floor Plans. click Visibility. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 767 . verify that Coarse. 14 In the Project Browser. and clear Plan/RCP. under View Specific Display. Medium. 19 Under Detail Levels. click Modify and select the dimension. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

and click OK. under Name. and click OK. click Duplicate. select Oak Door. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 13 On the Design Bar. 6 Click OK. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Materials. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. and click OK. 3 In the New Material dialog box. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. under AccuRender. click OK. for Material. 768 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Panel for Subcategory. enter Oak Door for Name. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion.20 On the Options Bar. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. 15 On the Options Bar. for Material. you assign a material to the door leaf. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 In the Materials dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 7 In the Materials dialog box. click . 2 In the Materials dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. click for Texture. click Modify. click .Dark. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material.Red/Stained. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 768. select Oak Door for Name.No Gloss. 9 On the Options Bar.

and select Shading with Edges. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. 21 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). under 3D Views. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. click the Model Graphics Style control. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 769 .The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. double-click View 1.

27 Click OK. By flexing the new component. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. Under Other. In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. enter 2500 mm for Height. click Family Types. enter 2000 mm for Height. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. Enter 1000 mm for Width. 770 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 75 mm for Frame Width. and click OK.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. under Family Types. “Defining New Door Types” on page 770 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. 24 On the Design Bar. click New. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Click Apply. 3 In the Name dialog box.

Enter 925 mm for Width. click Browse. select Project. Click Apply. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. navigate to the location where you saved the door family.rfa. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Training Files. click New. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. click Door. 6 In the Name dialog box. enter 2134 mm for Height. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 12 On the File menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Training Door.4 In the Family Types dialog box. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 11 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 19 On the Options Bar. click New. 9 In the Name dialog box. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. Click Apply. Defining New Door Types | 771 . 17 Under Create new. and click Open. click Wall. Click Apply. 8 Under Family Types. and click OK. click Load. click New ➤ Project. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. and click OK. Enter 750 mm for Width. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Template file. Define the third new door type. 20 In the Open dialog box.rfa. select it. Training Door. and click OK. enter 2000 mm for Height. Define the second new door type. Enter 1220 mm for Width. 5 Under Family Types. enter 2100 mm for Height. click Save. 15 In the New Project dialog box.rte.

29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 28 In the Type Selector. 24 On the View Control Bar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 26 In the Type Selector. 772 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . click the Model Graphics Style control.23 On the View toolbar. click Door. and select Shading with Edges. 25 On the Design Bar.

You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. You create the window frame. default sill height. glazing and mullions as extrusions. Finally. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. height. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. Creating a Door Family. This completes the lesson. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. and create the window sash as a sweep.30 In the Type Selector. and mullion offset. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. and specify values for the window width. 32 You can close all files without saving. Creating a Window Family | 773 .

5 On the View menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. are also displayed. equally spaced vertical mullions. click Training Files. Labelled dimensions. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The label name. 2 On the File menu. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. part of the window properties. 8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. you specify the parameters for the new window family. also one of the window properties. click Tile. Four views are tiled on your display. click New ➤ Family. Height and Default Sill Height.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. 4 On the Window menu. is one of the type parameters. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. The window type has a variable height and width. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. 7 Enter ZF. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 774 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft. When you add labels to dimensions.

This process is called “flexing the model. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 775. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 1800 mm for Width. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. 12 Click OK. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. enter 1300 mm for Height. and click Apply. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 775 . Click Apply. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. then sketching the sweep profile. Change the height and width values again. This is the starting point for the new window.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width.

click Sketch Profile. and select 1:10. 4 On the Options Bar. Snap the cursor to each corner. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 9 On the View Control Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: Right. and click Open View. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. 3 On the Design Bar.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. click the Scale control. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. 2 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. click Lines. 776 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .

and specify an offset of 50 mm. select Prefer: Wall faces. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 777 . 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 11 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify.The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 12 On the Options Bar. and select the dimension. click .

and select the reference plane. the exact dimensions are not critical. click Modify. and click OK. NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. 23 On the Options Bar. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click Lines. However. 24 Below the red dot. under Identity Data. select Chain and click . 25 On the Design Bar. 778 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Sash for the Name. click . sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 19 On the Design Bar. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click Modify.18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 20 On the Options Bar. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. 28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face.26 Select the right edge of the frame section. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 779 . and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. When the lock displays. When the lock displays. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section.

29 On the Design Bar. TIP After adding the dimension. 780 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. select the line you want to move. click Dimension. Modify each dimension if necessary. click Modify. and specify the dimension value. as shown.

expand 3D Views. Next. 37 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. When the lock displays. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame.Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click the lock to constrain the present value. click Finish Profile. zoom out until it displays. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. click the lock to constrain the present value. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. If necessary. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. under Views (all). and double-click View 1. 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. click . Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. 33 On the Tools toolbar. this is the top of the window opening. When the lock displays. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 781 .

39 Proceed to the next exercise. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 782. and enter . under Elevations. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 5 On the Options Bar. and select Lock. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Lines. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.45 mm for Depth. under Specify a new Work Plane. and select the option. 782 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. Chain of walls or lines. click .38 In the Project Browser. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name.

and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.The entire sash outline is selected. ■ ■ Enter .50 mm for Offset. ■ Click . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 783 . click Finish Sketch. set the following options: Click . 9 On the Design Bar. and lock icons display on each line.

Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. 784 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. under 3D Views.10 In the Project Browser. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. double-click View 1. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 784. The window sash extrusion is now complete. double-click Right. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In the Project Browser. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion.

3 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Right. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. as shown. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 785 . and enter 30 mm for Offset. 2 On the Design Bar. click . under Elevations.

and select Lock. click Lines. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click . 11 In the Project Browser. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. 8 Select the reference plane. double-click Exterior. 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Identity Data. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. enter -12 mm for Depth. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. and click OK.5 On the Design Bar. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. 9 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 786 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . and click to create the glass boundary. under Elevations. click Dimension. 13 On the Design Bar.

NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. 23 On the Design Bar. After the family is loaded into a project. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. double-click Right. under Elevations.18 On the Design Bar. click . specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under Identity Data. View the window model with frame. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 787 . sash. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Options Bar.

Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types.24 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. enter 1500 mm for Height. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. For example. 788 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. NOTE After flexing the model. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. double-click View 1. Click Apply. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Under Other. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 1000 mm for Height. Under Other. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 789. double-click Exterior. Click OK. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. the exact location is not critical.27 In the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 789 . click Ref Plane. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Enter 2000 mm for Width. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions.

Do not be concerned with dimension values. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. click Dimension. as shown.4 On the Design Bar. After adding the dimension. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. as shown. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. 790 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Do not be concerned with dimension values.

specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Select Instance. select Dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Mullion Offset for Name. select <Add parameter. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. click Family Types. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom.Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.. and click OK. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. under Dimensions. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. Click OK.> for Label. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 791 .. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. 9 On the Options Bar. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. Under Group parameter under.

14 Click the dimension value. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 18 On the Design Bar. 792 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. As you did before. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. move the dimension value as shown. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Mullion Offset for Label. click Set Work Plane.Notice the dimension value becomes editable. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar.

Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. enter 14 mm for Depth. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines.21 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. and click . After you complete the sketch. Move the dimension values as shown. However. click Lines. 23 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. 22 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 793 . and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. click Dimension. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions.

select Family parameter. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. select Dimensions. Select Type. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Under Group parameter under. 30 On the Options Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Click OK. select <Add parameter> for Label. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. Under Parameter Data. enter Mullion Width for Name. 794 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Remember.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. This is changed in later steps. select Mullion Width for Label. click Finish Sketch. Select the dimension. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 795 . 33 On the Design Bar.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. Click Apply. click Family Types. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. enter 1500 mm for Height. and click Apply. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. 796 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Other. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Enter 1500 mm for Width.

Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. 42 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 797 . return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 41 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane.NOTE After flexing the model. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. and click OK. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. and aligned with the sash edge. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 37 In the Family Types dialog box. click . Click OK. or undoing the same. 39 On the Design Bar. click Lines. evenly spaced. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. Enter 2000 mm for Width. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Click Apply. Under Other. enter 1000 mm for Height. In this case.

and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. as shown.44 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. click Dimension. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Move the dimension value as shown. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. click Modify. click Dimension. Remember. 46 On the Design Bar. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. 49 On the Options Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 48 On the Design Bar. 798 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. click Join Geometry. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 799 . ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. click Finish Sketch. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. and select the vertical mullions. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. select Mullion Width for Label. The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. Select the dimension.

you can still see the window. double-click View 1. Under Other. enter 1500 mm for Height. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. If necessary. Click Apply. 57 In the Family Types dialog box. 56 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Width. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.54 In the Project Browser. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. 800 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

“Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 801. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 801 . sash. Click OK. enter 1000 mm for Height. Under Other. you assign materials to the frame. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height.58 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Click Apply.

No Gloss.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. click for Texture. click OK. Medium. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. Yellow/. and click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. clear the other view options. select Stained. 13 In the Materials dialog box. sash. and click OK. and click OK. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. click Duplicate. 8 On the View Control Bar. click . and select Shading with Edges. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. select Edit for Visibility. 16 Under Detail Levels. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. click Modify. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. under Graphics. under Elevations. 3 In the New Material dialog box. enter Pine Frame for Name. double-click Exterior. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. Dark. 18 On the Design Bar. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. click for Material. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. and the mullions. the sash. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. under Identity Data. and Fine are selected. select Pine Frame for Name. click Materials. 9 Select the window frame sweep. under View Specific Display. under AccuRender. 802 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . verify that Coarse. 4 In the Materials dialog box.

click Visibility. double-click View 1. and Fine are selected. Medium. 21 On the Options Bar. verify that Coarse. under View Specific Display. 23 Under Detail Levels. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 25 Zoom in on a window corner. 20 Select the glass extrusion.Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. under 3D Views. double-click Right. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 803 . select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box.

sash. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 804 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . mullions. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window.The window frame. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. “Defining New Window Types” on page 804. and glass display their assigned materials. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.

2 On the Design Bar.Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. The window height is doubled. Defining New Window Types | 805 . enter 2000 mm for Height. under Family Types. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. and click Apply. Enter 1250 mm for Height. Click Apply. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. and click OK. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Name dialog box. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. click New. In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1000 mm for Height. and click Apply. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. click Family Types.

click Window.rfa file. click New. navigate to the location of your Training Window. Click OK. 20 In the Open dialog box. select it.rfa. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. Training Window. 15 On the File menu. Click Apply. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 806 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. 13 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. Enter 1500 mm for Height. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. click to start a new project based on your default template. 19 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 11 In the Family Types dialog box. 10 In the Name dialog box. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Enter 1300 mm for Height.9 Under Family Types. click Load. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. and click Open. click New. click Save.

31 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 24 On the Options Bar. click Window. 34 On the View toolbar. click Thin Lines. click Wall. click Modify. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click . 27 In the Type Selector.Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Defining New Window Types | 807 . 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. and select Shading with Edges. 25 In the Type Selector. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. clear Tag on Placement. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. Notice the detail that displays. 23 On the Design Bar. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 35 On the View Control Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 32 On the View menu.

drawer base. rolltop. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. 808 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. Finally. and drawers as extrusions. You begin by creating the desktop.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 4 Maximize the view. 5 On the View menu.rft. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Floor Plan: Ref. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. 2 On the File menu. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown.Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. click Training Files. click Ref Plane. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Level. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. click New ➤ Family. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 809 . The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. their exact location is not critical. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes.

10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. as shown. and ending at the right reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 810 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. click Dimension.Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.

12 On the Design Bar. and ending at the lower reference plane. click Dimension. 15 On the Design Bar. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. 13 Select the left reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. click Modify. as shown. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 811 .

19 Select the upper. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 18 On the Design Bar. as shown. horizontal reference plane. click Modify. 812 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .17 To the right of the dimension you just created. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane.

. Select Type. Afterwards.21 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. select Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. TIP To do this. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.. Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. 24 On the Options Bar. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. select Family parameter. Click OK. click Modify. For Group parameter under.> for Label. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 813 . enter Length for Name. select <Add parameter.

select <Add parameter. you can still see the model. Select Type. 27 On the Options Bar. Therefore. click Family Types. select Family parameter.26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. enter Depth for Name. 30 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Click OK.. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. select Dimensions. 814 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Parameter Data.

Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. it will also adapt to the same changes. click Symbolic Lines. Click Apply. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 815. Click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. enter 3000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. NOTE In the image below. Click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. enter 2000 mm for Length. click . Your lines may have a lighter weight. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 815 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.31 In the Family Types dialog box.

click Modify. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. double-click Front. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. and select the top edge. 5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box.4 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. 816 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter 100 mm for Depth. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. select Level: Ref. under Elevations. 7 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 11 In the Project Browser. Level for Name. click . and click to select all four symbolic lines. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. 8 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane.

specify the following: ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. 22 On the Options Bar. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 817 . as shown. click Dimension. enter Height for Name. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. click Modify. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. select <Add parameter.14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. and select the bottom edge.> for Label. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar...

select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. Click OK.■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Select Type. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK. Select Type. Click Apply. you can still see the model... select Family parameter. and click Apply. and click Apply. click Modify. enter 4000 mm for Length. 29 On the Design Bar. 818 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 In the Family Types dialog box. 27 On the Design Bar.> for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Enter 750 mm for Height. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 818. click Family Types. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. enter 2000 mm for Length. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. select Dimensions. enter Thickness for Name. 25 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. select <Add parameter. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. and click Apply. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 31 In the Family Types dialog box.

and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. under Floor Plans. click Dimension. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. and enter 100 mm for Offset. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 819 .Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. click . Level. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Lock the dimension as shown. click Set Work Plane. click . Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box.7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. 820 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. select Level: Ref. click Lines. Level for Name. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. as shown. Click the lock icon as shown. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar.

15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes.After you complete the rectangle. two lock icons display. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 821 . click Dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

You can also highlight the entire line chain. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. 19 Select the four sketched lines. click Modify. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. using the TAB key. click . 822 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 For the align-to reference. click the Mirror tool. as shown below at the cursor. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 20 On the Tools toolbar. .Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Tools toolbar. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base.

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. A lock icon displays.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. 26 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 823 .

Under Parameter Data.> for Label. 824 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Type. select Family parameter.. select Dimensions. Click OK. select <Add parameter. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. For Group parameter under. as shown. 30 On the Options Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.■ Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 28 Add two final dimensions. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. double-click Front. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 825 . 35 On the Design Bar. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 33 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Finish Sketch. under Elevations.

click it to lock the alignment. click . click Visibility/Graphics. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 40 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. notice that annotations display in this view. 45 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. After the alignment. 826 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .37 On the Tools toolbar. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. However. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click . 42 On the View menu. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. a lock icon displays. click the Scale control and select 1:20. 41 On the View toolbar.

and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 1200 mm for Height.Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 47 On the Design Bar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 827 . and click Apply. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. you can still see the model. and click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 827. Click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Height. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise.

then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. click Lines. 2 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Elevations. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. as shown. double-click Right. click . and click to specify the upper left corner. under Specify a new Work Plane. 828 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane.

10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. and lock the alignment. then the lower horizontal sketch line. click . 9 Select the desk top. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment.8 On the Tools toolbar. then select the right parallel sketch line. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 829 .

click Finish Sketch. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. click the Fillet arc tool. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. 830 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. the upper sketch line. 14 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and lock it. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. and lock it.11 On the Design Bar. .

under Elevations. double-click Front. and click the lock icon. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 831 .The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. select the left edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. 18 On the Tools toolbar. select the right edge of the rolltop. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. click .

832 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click . and click Apply. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Height. and click Apply.21 On the View toolbar. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. You can also use dimension constraints. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. click Family Types. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. and click Apply. you can still see the model. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. enter 4000 mm for Length. If not.

“Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 833.25 In the Family Types dialog box. click Set Work Plane. Click OK. Enter 750 mm for Height. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Pick a Plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Specify a new Work Plane. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 833 . 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise.

14 On the Tools toolbar. There should be four dimensions as shown. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 834 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Multiple Alignment. click Lines. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. 6 On the Design Bar.5 In the Project Browser. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. . 11 On the Tools toolbar. click drawer set on the left. click . 7 On the Options Bar. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. zoom the view until you do. click Dimension. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. click . 12 On the Options Bar. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. under Elevations. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Front.

Wood. under AccuRender. click . click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. 25 In the New Material dialog box. click Extrusion Properties. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. and click OK. for Material. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. 20 On the View toolbar. click . Polished. and select Shading with Edges. 29 In the Materials dialog box. Dark. click Modify. click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar. click for Texture. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. click OK. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. 22 On the Options Bar. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 835 . click 24 In the Materials dialog box. click the Model Graphics Style control. 19 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 27 In the Material Library dialog box. 28 Click OK. enter Desk . 16 On the Design Bar. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. under Constraints. 17 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes.15 On the Tools toolbar. Cherry. 26 In the Materials dialog box. click Duplicate.

836 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 750 mm for Height. You can also use dimension constraints. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. If not. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 33 On the Design Bar. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. enter 4000 mm for Length.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. click Family Types. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. and click Apply. and click Apply. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 836. enter 2000 mm for Length. you can still see the model. and click Apply.

4 In the Family Types dialog box. 11 On the File menu. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. and click OK. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. Defining New Furniture Types | 837 . click Family Types. 15 On the View Control Bar. click New. 8 Under Family Types. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. click Load. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. click Save. under Family Types. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. click Apply. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. and click Apply. select it. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. and click OK. Training Furniture. and click Apply. 18 In the Open dialog box. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. click .rfa. and click Open. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 9 In the Name dialog box.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. 3 In the Name dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. click New. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. 6 In the Name dialog box. 5 Under Family Types. click Component.rfa file. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. click 14 On the View toolbar. to start a new project based on your default template. and click OK.

and add the second desk. 23 In the Type Selector. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. and click to add the third desk. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. 838 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .21 In the Type Selector. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

click Lines. their exact location is not critical. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 9 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Select Metric Baluster. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. click Set Work Plane. expand Floor Plans. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. and click Open. Level for Name.rft. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. and double-click Ref. Drawing a Baluster | 839 . 5 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Family. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 7 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 4 On the Design Bar. However. 2 On the View menu. click Finish Sketch.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Level. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. select Ref.

you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. The new custom baluster is now complete. click Stairs. and click Open. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. By default. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. In the New Project Dialog box. 2 In the New Project dialog box.rte file. 12 On the Options Bar. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. select Training Files. 840 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. click the Modelling tab. 11 On the Design Bar. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. click Finish Sketch. Select the DefaultMetric. click . click Browse. click New ➤ Project.rfa. 14 Click the lock icon. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. click Modify and select the extrusion.

click Edit for Baluster Placement. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 On the View menu. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. select it. click OK. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. click Modify and select the existing railing. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Open dialog box. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 11 On the View menu. under Baluster Family. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click .rfa file. click . and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar. click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 19 Click OK. click Shading with Edges. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 841 .7 On the File menu.

click New ➤ Family. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. and click Open. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . balusters. a stair nosing. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. and other sweep-defined objects. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. a railing. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings.Sweep. The new sweep profile is now complete. you draw a sweep profile. In this lesson. click Lines. a reveal. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. their exact location is not critical.rft. However. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection.rfa. soffits. you create a rail profile. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. In the left pane of the New dialog box. select Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you create five different profiles: a sweep. cornices. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. 842 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Metric Profile. and a host sweep.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click New ➤ Family. click New ➤ Family. under Floor Plans. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. Dataset ■ On the File menu. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar.rft. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Level is open.rfa. verify that Ref. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. click Lines. and click Open. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. However. The new rail profile is now complete. Select Metric Profile-Rail.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.Rail. In the left pane of the New dialog box. you create a stair nosing profile. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. select Training Files. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 843 . The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. their exact location is not critical.

Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. verify that Ref. Level is open. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.Stair Nosing. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.rft. 844 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Select Metric Profile-Reveal. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. However. In addition. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. you create a reveal profile. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog box. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. select Training Files. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. and click Open. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. and click Open. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . click New ➤ Family. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. select Training Files. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. click Lines. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box.rfa. under Floor Plans. their exact location is not critical.rft.

their exact location is not critical. verify that Ref. However.rft. under Floor Plans. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 845 . select Training Files. and click Open. Select Metric Profile-Hosted. you create a host sweep profile. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise.Reveal. The new reveal profile is now complete. click New ➤ Family. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click Lines.rfa. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the New dialog box. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. Level is open. which may be any vertical surface.

846 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Create. In the New Project Dialog box.rfa. However. click Lines.rte file. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. click Browse. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. Select the DefaultMetric. select Training Files. click OK. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Specify the family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog box. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). Create a new project 1 On the File menu.Host Sweep. click New ➤ Project. their exact location is not critical. and click Open. The new host sweep profile is now complete. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template.

and click OK. 15 On the View toolbar.rfa. Modify the sweep profile configuration 16 In the Project Browser. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 847 . select it. and click Open. the exact location of the path is not critical.Sweep. 11 In the Open dialog box. 13 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. select Generic Models for Family Category. navigate to the location of Profile . 7 On the Design Bar. and double-click South. click Finish Family. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 10 On the Options Bar. enter Sweep for Name. Sketch the 2D sweep path 6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. expand Elevations. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. and click OK. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. click Finish Sweep. click Load Profiles. 9 On the Design Bar.Sweep. 8 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. 17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. beside Load Profiles. expand Views (all). select Profile . click Finish Path. click .4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 5 In the Name dialog box. 14 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path.

and in the left pane of the New dialog box. and click Open. 848 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. on the Options Bar. 21 Select the sweep profile again and. click New ➤ Project. Draw a wall group 3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the View toolbar. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. 23 Click OK. Under Other. click Wall. 24 On the Design Bar. select Profile Is Flipped. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. select Training Files. The sweep profile application is now complete. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . click Ref Plane. click Edit. click OK. click Finish Family. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. click . In the New Project Dialog box. click Browse.rte file. 2 In the New Project dialog box. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Select the DefaultMetric.18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Under Constraints. click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. on the Options Bar. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 20 Select the sweep profile and.

7 On the Options Bar. verify that Horizontal is selected. click . 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 4 Draw four walls as shown. 5 On the View toolbar. their exact location is not critical. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 849 .NOTE When you draw the walls. 9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

click Modify. navigate to the location of Profile .10 On the Design Bar.Host Sweep for Profile. and click Open. 17 On the View toolbar.Host Sweep : Profile . 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. and click OK.rft. select Training Files. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. under Construction. 850 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and area with labels added to extract project data. click Edit/New. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. floor and ceiling finish. and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. 13 Select the wall sweep and. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. click OK. 12 In the Open dialog box. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 11 On the File menu. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . . on the Options Bar. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. you specify the room tag parameters. select it. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Profile . you create a room tag which displays room name. click Spin [Shift]. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the New dialog box.Host Sweep. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Select M_Room Tag. 18 In the Dynamic View dialog box.rfa. and click Open.

20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. click Duplicate. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Area. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. select Floor Finish. click Label. enter 2mm for Name. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 7 In the Type properties dialog box. 8 In the Name dialog box. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. click Label.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 17 In the Type Selector. select Underline. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 851 . 3 On the Options Bar. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. select Name. click OK. 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Label : 2mm. 16 Zoom in on the label. and click OK. and click OK. click . and click OK. clear Underline. and click OK. select Ceiling Finish.

3 On the Options Bar. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. and click Open. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise.rfa. The new room tag is now ready for use. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. select Training Files. click . you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. notice that there is only one view available. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. click Lines. Select Generic Annotation. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. 852 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. In the left pane of the New dialog box. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar.rft. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters.

Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 853 . 6 On the Options Bar. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. click .

click Modify. click New. and click OK. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project.rfa. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Modify. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. 854 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the upper vertical line. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. click Modify. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. click Object Styles. select North Line. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. under Modify Subcategories. select 3 for Line Weight. enter North Line for Name. Training North Arrow.10 On the Design Bar. in the North Line row.

you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. and your project data.rfa. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click Modify. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson.Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. select A1 metric. 5 Click OK. In the New Project Dialog box. click New ➤ Project. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. click OK. text. click Browse. and click Open. and click Open. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click New ➤ Titleblock. select Training Files. 7 On the File menu. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.rte file. The titleblock has linework. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. select it. and labels. Dataset ■ On the File menu. Select the DefaultMetric. click Symbol. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family | 855 . 12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. graphics. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. 8 In the Open dialog box. select Training North Arrow. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and in the left pane of the New dialog box.

rft. and enter -25 for Offset. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. 3 On the Options Bar. click . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. 856 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. . Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. and enter 140 for Offset. and click Open. and click to draw a new vertical line. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click . 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. click Lines. Select A0 metric. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and click . Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar.

23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. and enter 20 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. select Wide Lines. 21 On the Options Bar. click . click Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. select Title Blocks. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 857 . 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. press CTRL. 16 In the Type Selector. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. enter 30 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 12 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. click Modify. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector.11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line.

you add a company logo. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise.jpg. and click Open. text notes. The titleblock linework is now complete. 858 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Import/Link ➤ Image.25 On the Design Bar. and labels to your titleblock. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. click Modify. 4 Zoom in on the logo. select Company Logo. navigate to Training Files/Common. 2 In the Open dialog box. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet.

11 Click OK twice. in the text box. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. under Text. select Text : 8mm. enter 10 for Text Size. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Text. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown.Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Name dialog box. and add an address and phone number as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. and select Bold. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 859 . 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . and click OK.

and select the consultant text note. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and drag the text note down as shown. click Modify. and select the last text note. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. Add consultant name. 18 Select the drag handle. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click Text. 860 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 17 On the Design Bar. address.Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. click Modify. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification.

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. click . select Constrain and Multiple. 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 861 . 25 Click inside the Consultant text group.

click Edit/New. under Text. click . and enter Date:.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 34 Click OK twice. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. and enter Checked By:. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. select Text : 5mm. click Text. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. enter 5 for Text Size. and click OK. and enter Drawn By:. and enter Sheet Number:. 862 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 5mm for Name. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 32 In the Name dialog box. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box.

The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. click Label. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. select Project Issue Date. and click OK.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. and click to specify the label location. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 863 .

60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. select Checked By and click OK. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Label : 15mm Label. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 50 On the Options Bar. click Center and Middle. under Text. enter 15mm Label for Name. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 53 In the Name dialog box. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. click . 59 On the Options Bar. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. enter 15 for Text Size. 55 Click OK twice. select Project Number.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. select Sheet Number. click Label. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Drawn By. and click OK. click Duplicate. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 864 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to specify the label location. click Edit/New. and click to specify the label location.

64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Label. select Client Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 865 . select Project Name. and click OK.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field.

select 4mm Label.70 On the Options Bar. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 77 On the Options Bar. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. click Sheet. and labels are now complete. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. enter 4 for Text Size. click . and click Open. click Modify. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter 4mm Label. In the New Project Dialog box. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. and click OK. select File Path. The titleblock graphics. click New ➤ Project. 5 In the Open dialog box. 75 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. 73 In the Name dialog box. click Left and Middle. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and click OK. 80 On the Design Bar. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. click Duplicate. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric. click Browse.rfa. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. under Text.rte file. and click Open. and click to specify the label location.rfa file. select it. click Load. select Training Files. text. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. 866 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 Click OK.

under Other. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Name for Drawn By. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. and click OK. click Project Information. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 867 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. Enter In Progress for Project Status. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click . 2005 for Project Issue Date. 12 On the Settings menu. Enter Office Building for Project Name. click Modify and select the titleblock. 14 Click OK.

Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. you create the dome roof with a revolved form.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. click Project Units. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. 868 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. set the Area to Square meters. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. click Orient ➤ Southeast. select Training and navigate to the Common folder.rvt. on the Settings menu. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. and click Open. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. and set the suffix to None. Set the Length units to millimeters. To change the units of measurement to meters. Select c_Pantheon.

Next. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 869 . 5 In the Name dialog box. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. select Roofs for Family Category. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Section: Wall Section .Center. and click Open View. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. click Create. enter Dome for Name. 7 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations. and click OK. and click OK. expand Views (all). 2 In the Project Browser. select Pick a Plane. and double-click South.

870 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Axis. 12 On the Options Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. click . 15 On the Options Bar.The center wall section view is displayed. click . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click Lines. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar.

Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 871 . Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.17 Move the cursor out. and select Chain. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. click . 19 On the Options Bar. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.

click Lines. click . 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. click . 872 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 27 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. 23 On the Options Bar. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar.

click . Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. click Lines. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click and select Chain. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 873 . 32 On the Options Bar. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint.

click . click Revolution Properties. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click OK. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. click for Material. 874 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Family. 38 In the Materials dialog box. 41 On the Design Bar. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. select Concrete . 40 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Create. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. under Materials and Finishes. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box.35 Select the interior face of the wall. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. select Pick a Plane. and click OK. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 875 . select Section: Wall Section . Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. click Axis.2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown.Center. 11 On the Options Bar. double-click South. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. click . click Set Work Plane. select Floors for Family Category. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. and click Open View. enter Concave Floor for Name. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog box. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations.

NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. click Lines. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm.O. and select Chain. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. click . Footing level line and the axis. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 14 On the Options Bar. 876 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar.

double-click 3D Section View. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson.18 Specify the intersection of the T. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click for Material. click Finish Sketch.O.O. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 877 . select Cobblestone for Name. click OK. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 22 In the Materials dialog box. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Finish Family. click Revolution Properties.

878 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. assigned subcatecories. not specifically how to make a floor truss. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit MEP 2008. 879 . formula-based parameters. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. In this case. you will understand the process. methodology. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords.Parametric Component Design Techniques 18 In this tutorial. During this tutorial. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. The truss also has multiple types. In exercises that become increasingly complex. At the end of this tutorial. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. and detail level controls. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor.

you determine the requirements of the new component. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. this must be a structural beam component. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. Take this into consideration during your design planning. It should also be an available option within a beam system. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. it is not the best solution. Although this solution is possible. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. In this lesson. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. beams. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. and also works intuitively with them. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. a generic floor-based component might work. In this case. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 880 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . NOTE When creating a new family. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. Two types should be created. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. In this case. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. you should avoid over-designing the component. In addition.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. In the next exercise. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. For every complexity added to a family. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. For training purposes. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. and structural walls.

you determined that the component type is a structural beam. would require Instance or Type parameters. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. In the previous exercise. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 881. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. the planning stage and questions may differ. Depending on the family you are designing. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. 4 Continue with the next exercise. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. In addition. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. such as wood type. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. Selecting the Family Template | 881 .For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials.

click Training Files. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. and open Metric\Templates. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based.rft 882 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rft. Notice that most of the template names include the component type.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. this is where you access family templates. However. Usually. 4 Scroll through the various template options. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. notice the preview. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. ■ Metric Structural Framing . Select it so that the preview displays. 6 In the New dialog box. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box.Beams and Braces. In addition. On the right side of the New dialog box. for example: wall based or floor based. scroll to the structural framing templates. There are two structural framing templates provided. you will access them from the Training Files folder. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. Like most generic family templates.

it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing .Complex and Trusses.Complex and Trusses.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Floor Plan: Ref.Beams and Braces. Level.rft. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . This template is the best starting point for the new family. Because of its simplicity. and display functions required by structural beams. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template.rft to open it. Floor Plan: Ref. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. Level Selecting the Family Template | 883 .Beams and Braces.rft and notice the preview. 10 Maximize the view. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). it is not the best starting point for the beam family. spacing. and notice the preview. ■ Metric Structural Framing .

Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. Therefore. under Floor Plans. Reference Plane: Left. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. 11 In the Project Browser. lines. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. 12 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Level. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. under 3D Views. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock.In this view. under Elevations. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ref. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. you add the reference planes. 884 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Like many templates. double-click Front. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 884. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. however. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. you add reference planes to the beam design. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise.

notice the location of the beam extents. In the project plan view image below. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. In the image below. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 885 . ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns.

You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. In a later exercise. 886 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click . Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click Ref Plane. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 5 On the Edit Toolbar.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. Before adding new reference planes. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it.

TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. under Elevations. 13 On the Design Bar. Level as the mirror axis. Level. and select the Level: Ref. click . double-click Front. select the lower horizontal reference plane. To do this. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. click Ref Plane. click on the Edit toolbar. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.Add ref. Level. click to place it. click Ref Plane. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Design Bar. Adding Reference Planes | 887 . 14 On the Options Bar.

17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 19 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. Before you move on to the next exercise. click to place it as shown. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. 888 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques .16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm.

under Floor Plans. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. click to place it as shown. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Level. specify an Offset of 238 mm. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. double-click Ref. Adding Reference Planes | 889 . click to place it as shown. which you do in the next exercise.

3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. Wood Floor Truss. click . Make sure you remember where you saved it.rfa. and click Save. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. 890 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 28 Proceed to the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. click Dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 890. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. After adding the dimension. click Modify. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial.25 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Save As dialog box.

Place the dimension as shown. and the lower horizontal reference plane.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. place the dimension to the left as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. click Modify. click Dimension. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. 4 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 891 . the Center reference plane. click Dimension.

Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. and place it below the dimension you added previously. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. Level.NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 892 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

add two dimensions as shown. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition. dimensions. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 893 . These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. you will add additional reference planes. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. and constraints as needed. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 894. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. Throughout the tutorial. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project.Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. In the next exercise.

If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. In this exercise. Select Type. enter Chord Width for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. under Floor Plans. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. consider making it an instance parameter. 894 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click Ref. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. When you design a new family. If the component has material that varies per component. 3 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. Wood Floor Truss. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible.Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. it becomes a parameter. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Add parameter for Label. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. select Family parameter. Level. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. consider making it a type parameter. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. consider making it a type parameter.rfa. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. ■ Click OK.

Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. double-click Front. Click OK. enter Depth for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Creating New Length Parameters | 895 . enter Center Chase Width for Name. Click OK. select Family parameter. select Add parameter for Label. Under Parameter Data. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. 7 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. select Add parameter for Label. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Elevations. Select Type. 10 On the Options Bar. Select Type.Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

select Family parameter.Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. select Chord Thickness for Label. 16 On the Options Bar. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. Click OK. Select Type. 896 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. enter Chord Thickness for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type.

20 On the File menu. If you add a new material parameter. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. 19 Click Cancel. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. click Save. 18 On the Design Bar. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. Adding or modifying a parameter. When you load this family into a project. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. Flexing the Component Model | 897 . click Family Types. Dimensions. This is not limited to length parameters.17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. In the Family Types dialog box. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. “Flexing the Component Model” on page 897.

Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. When you open the Family Types dialog box. you can drag it to the opposing corner. or ■ Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. In this exercise. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.■ ■ ■ Adding a new constraint. Wood Floor Truss. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family.rfa. click Family Types. When you flex a family. After you verify this. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. enter 600 mm for Depth. and click Apply. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. When you open the Family Types dialog. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. 2 On the Design Bar. Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. under Dimensions. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. Nesting a component. 898 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

800 mm for Center Chase Width. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Click OK. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth.Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Flexing the Component Model | 899 . 80 mm for Chord Thickness. Level. In addition. Click Apply. and click Apply. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Wood Floor Truss. you align and lock their position. and select Lock. Dataset Continue to use the dataset.When working within the Family Editor. 5 On the Design Bar. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Left. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. under Elevations. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. and click OK. click . After flexing the design. 6 On the File menu. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. 3 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Member Left. “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 900. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box.rfa. After adding the chords. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. click Lines. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. click Name. 900 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Save. After creating the extrusions.

13 On the Tools toolbar. click . 11 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. the lines will no longer overlap. click Lines. click .Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. Creating Solid Extrusions | 901 . When using the Trim tool. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. click . click the part of the line you want to keep. 8 On the Tools toolbar. and verify that Lock is selected.

as shown. 3 Select the chord extrusions. 4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. Adding Constraints